’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Foreword
Welcome to the growing group of value−conscious people who drive Toyotas. We are proud of the advanced engineering and
quality construction of each vehicle we build.
This Owner’s Manual explains the operation of your new Toyota. Please read it thoroughly and have all the occupants
follow the instructions carefully. Doing so will help you enjoy many years of safe and trouble−free motoring. For
important information about this manual and your Toyota, read the following pages carefully.
When it comes to service, remember that your Toyota dealer knows your vehicle best and is interested in your complete
satisfaction. He will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require.
If there is not a Toyota dealer near you, or you need emergency assistance for any reason, please call the following number:

 U.S. OWNERS: Toyota Customer Assistance Center Toll−free:1−800−331−4331

Please leave this Owner’s Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also.
All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of Toyota’s policy of
continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may
find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.

© 2003 TOYOTA MOTOR CORPORATION

All rights reserved. This material may not be reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, without the written permission of Toyota
Motor Corporation.

i
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Important information about this manual

Safety and vehicle damage warnings Safety symbol

Throughout this manual, you will see safety and vehicle
damage warnings. You must follow these warnings carefully
to avoid possible injury or damage.
The types of warnings, what they look like, and how they
are used in this manual are explained as follows:

CAUTION
This is a warning against anything which may cause
injury to people if the warning is ignored. You are
informed about what you must or must not do in
order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and
others. When you see the safety symbol
shown above, it means: “Do not”; “Do
not do this”; or “Do not let this hap-
NOTICE pen”.
This is a warning against anything which may cause
damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning
Important information About
is ignored. You are informed about what you must or
must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of
This Manual
damage to your vehicle and its equipment.

ii
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Important information about your Toyota

New vehicle warranty Accessories, spare parts and

Your new vehicle is covered by the following Toyota
modification of your Toyota
limited warranties:
A wide variety of non−genuine spare parts and accesso-
 New vehicle warranty ries for Toyota vehicles are currently available in the
 Emission control systems warranty market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant
 Others these products and is not responsible for their perfor-
For further information, please refer to the ”Owner’s mance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they
may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on,
Warranty Information Booklet” or ”Owner’s Manual Sup-
plement”. your Toyota vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non−genuine
Toyota products. Modification with non−genuine Toyota
products could affect its performance, safety or durabili-
Your responsibility for maintenance ty, and may even violate governmental regulations. In
addition, damage or performance problems resulting from
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure the the modification may not be covered under warranty.
specified maintenance is performed. Section 6 gives
details of these maintenance requirements. Also
included in Section 6 is general maintenance. For Important information About
scheduled maintenance information, place refer to the
”Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or ”Owner’s Manual Your Toyota
Supplement”.

iii
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Installation of a mobile On−pavement and off−road

two−way radio system driving tips
As the installation of a mobile two−way radio system in This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class. Utility
your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other
multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel types of vehicles. This vehicle will handle and maneuver
injection system, electronic throttle control system, differently from an ordinary passenger car because it is
cruise control system, anti−lock brake system, SRS air- designed for off−road use also. In addition, this vehicle
bag system and seat belt pretensioner system, be sure has a higher ground clearance and center of gravity than
to check with your Toyota dealer for precautionary mea- that of an ordinary passenger car. This vehicle design
sures or special instructions regarding installation. feature causes this type of vehicle to be more likely to
rollover. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result
in loss of control, accidents or vehicle rollover causing
death or serious injury. Be sure to read ”Off−road vehicle
Scrapping of your Toyota precautions” in Section 2 and ”Off−road driving precautions”
in Section 3.
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in
your Toyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle
is scrapped with the airbags and pretensioners left as
they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be
sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat
belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified
service shop or by your Toyota dealer before you dis-
pose of your vehicle.

iv
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

SECTION 1− 1
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Overview of instruments and controls
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Instrument cluster overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Indicator symbols on the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

1
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Instrument panel overview

View A
1. Side vents
2. Side defroster outlets
3. Instrument cluster
4. Center vents
5. Electric moon roof switches and/or
personal lights
6. Glove box
7. Power door lock switches
8. Power window switches
9. Automatic transmission selector lever
10. Seat heater switches
11. Rear seat audio system
12. Cup holder
13. Parking brake lever
14. Second start mode selector button and
driving pattern selector button
15. Four−wheel drive control lever
16. Lower vent
17. Hood lock release lever
18. Fuel filler door opener
19. Window lock switch

2
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

View B
1. Headlight, turn signal and front fog
light switches
2. Cruise control switch
3. Ignition switch
4. Wiper and washer switches
5. Emergency flasher switch
6. Clock, outside temperature and trip infor-
mation display
7. Car audio
8. Front passenger’s seat belt reminder
light
9. Air conditioning controls
10. Outside rear view mirror heater switch
11. Rear air conditioning switch
12. Rear window defogger switch
13. Center differential lock switch
14. Power antenna switch
15. Power tilt and telescopic steering
switch
16. Instrument panel light control dial
17. Power rear view mirror control switches
18. Power quarter window switch (left−hand
side)
19. Power quarter window switch (right−
hand side)
20. Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags
off switch

3
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Lower part of center cluster panel

1. Ashtray
2. Cigarette lighter
3. Power outlet

4
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Instrument cluster overview

1. Voltmeter 4. Tachometer 7. Odometer and two trip meters

2. Speedometer 5. Engine oil pressure gauge 8. Trip meter reset knob
3. Service reminder indicators and 6. Engine coolant temperature gauge 9. Fuel gauge
indicator lights

5
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Indicator symbols on the instrument panel

Brake system warning light∗1 Unengaged ”Park” warning light∗1

Automatic transmission fluid temperature warning

Driver’s seat belt reminder light∗1
light∗1

Discharge warning light∗1 Turn signal indicator lights

Engine oil replacement reminder light Headlight high beam indicator light

Malfunction indicator lamp∗1 Driving pattern (”POWER” mode) indicator

light

Low fuel level warning light∗1 Automatic transmission second start indicator
light

SRS warning light∗1 Center differential lock indicator light

Anti−lock brake system warning light∗1 Cruise control indicator light∗2

Open door warning light∗1 Automatic transmission indicator lights

6
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Vehicle skid control system off indicator light∗1

Vehicle skid control system and active traction

control system warning light∗1

Active traction control system indicator light

Slip indicator light

Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off indicator light∗3

∗1 : For details, see ”Service reminder indicators and warning

buzzers” on page 118.
∗2 : If this light flashes, see ”Cruise control” on page 138.
∗3 : For details, see ”Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off
switch” on page 65.

7
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

8
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

SECTION 1− 2
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Keys and Doors
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Engine immobiliser system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Side doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Power quarter windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Back door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Theft deterrent system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Fuel tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Electric moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

9
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Keys
A transponder chip for engine immobiliser
system has been placed in the head of
the master and sub keys. These chips are
needed to enable the system to function
correctly, so be careful not to lose these
keys. If you make your own duplicate key,
you will not be able to cancel the system
or start the engine.
To protect items locked in the glove box
when using valet parking, leave the sub
key with the attendant.
Since the side doors can be locked with-
out a key, you should always carry a
spare master key in case you accidentally
Your vehicle is supplied with two kinds
lock your keys inside the vehicle. NOTICE
of keys.
For information on use of the wireless When using a key containing a trans-
1. Master keys (black)—These keys work
remote control key, see ”Wireless remote ponder chip, observe the following
in every lock. Your Toyota dealer will
control” on page 15. precautions:
need one of them to make a new key
with a built−in transponder chip. z When starting the engine, do not
2. Sub key (gray)—This key does not use the key with a key ring resting
work in the glove box. on the key grip and do not press
the key ring against the key grip.
Otherwise the engine may not start,
or may stop soon after it starts.

10
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

z Do not cover the key grip with any

material that cuts off electromagnet-
ic waves.
z Do not knock the key hard against
other objects.
z Do not leave the key exposed to
high temperatures for a long period,
such as on the dashboard and hood
under the direct sunlight.
z Do not put the key in water or
wash it in an ultrasonic washer.
z Do not use the key with electromag-
netic materials.
z When starting the engine, do not z Do not bend the key grip.
use the key with other transponder
keys around (including keys of oth-
er vehicles) and do not press other
key plates against the key grip.
Otherwise the engine may not start,
or may stop soon after it starts. If
this happens, remove the key once
and then insert it again after remov-
ing other transponder keys (includ-
ing keys of other vehicles) from the
ring or while gripping or covering
them with your hand to start the
engine.

11
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Engine immobiliser system

KEY NUMBER PLATE The engine immobiliser system is a The system is automatically set when the
Your key number is shown on the plate. theft prevention system. When you in- key is removed from the ignition switch.
Keep the plate in a safe place such as sert the key in the ignition switch, the The indicator light will start flashing to
your wallet, not in the vehicle. transponder chip in the key’s head show the system is set.
transmits an electronic code to the ve- If either of the following indicator condi-
If you should lose your keys or if you hicle. The engine will start only when
need additional keys, duplicates can be tions occurs, contact your Toyota dealer.
the electronic code in the chip corre-
made by a Toyota dealer using the key sponds to the registered ID code for  The indicator light stays on except
number. the vehicle. when the theft deterrent system is set-
We recommend writing down the key num- ting or activating. (See ”Theft deterrent
ber and storing it in a safe place. system” on page 26.)
 The indicator light does not start flash-
ing when the key is removed from the
ignition switch.
 The indicator light flashes unsteady.

12
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Side doors—
Inserting the registered key in the ignition
switch automatically cancels the system,
which enables the engine to start. The FCC ID: MOZRI−20BTY
indicator light will go off. MADE IN JAPAN
For your Toyota dealer to make a new key
with a built−in transponder chip, your This device complies with Part 15 of the
dealer will need your key number and FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
master key. However, there is a limit to following two conditions:
the number of additional keys your Toyota (1) this device may not cause harmful
dealer can make for you. interference, and
If you make your own duplicate key, (2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
you will not be able to cancel the sys-
tem or start the engine. that may cause undesired operation.

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY

CAUTION Insert the key into the keyhole and turn
it.
Changes or modifications not ex- To lock: Turn the key forward.
pressly approved by the party respon- To unlock: Turn the key backward.
sible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equip- All the side doors and back door lock and
ment. unlock simultaneously with either front
side door. In the driver’s door lock, turn-
ing the key once will unlock the driver’s
door and twice in succession will unlock
all the side doors and back door simulta-
neously.*
NOTE: *The 2−step unlocking function can
be changed. Ask your Toyota dealer for
details.

13
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH

POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
Push the switch.
To lock: Push the switch down on the
front side.
To unlock: Push the switch down on the
rear side.
All the side doors and back door lock or
unlock simultaneously.
When the front side doors are locked from
the outside, the switch will not work until
the either front door is unlocked.
Driver’s side Auto door locking function*: All the side
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH
INSIDE LOCK KNOB doors and back door will lock automatical-
ly when the selector lever is moved out
Move the lock knob. of “P” position. This auto door locking
To lock: Push the knob forward. function is operable if any doors are un-
To unlock: Pull the knob backward. locked while the engine is running.
The front doors can be opened by pulling NOTE: *This auto door locking function
the inside handles even if the lock knob can be disabled or changed. Ask your
are in the lock position. Toyota dealer for details.
Closing the side door with the lock knob
in the lock position will also lock the side
door. Be careful not to lock your keys in
the vehicle.
Front side doors cannot be locked when
either front side door is open and the key
is in the ignition. Passenger’s side

14
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Wireless remote control*

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the doors

are closed and locked, especially
when small children are in the ve-
hicle. Along with the proper use of
seat belts, locking the doors helps
prevent the driver and passengers
from being thrown out from the ve-
hicle during an accident. It also helps
prevent the doors from being opened
unintentionally.

Locking operation
REAR DOOR CHILD−PROTECTORS
Move the lock lever to the ”LOCK”
position as shown on the label.
This feature allows you to lock a rear
door so it can be opened from the outside
only, not from inside. We recommend us-
ing this feature whenever small children
are in the vehicle.

Unlocking operation

15
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

The wireless remote control system is To unlock: Push the ”UNLOCK” switch
designed to lock or unlock all the side once to unlock the driver’s door alone.
doors and back door from a distance Pushing the switch twice within 3 seconds
within approximately 1 m (3 ft.) of the unlocks all the side doors and back door
vehicle. simultaneously.* At this time, turn signal
NOTE: *This feature can be deactivated lights flash twice.**
as vehicle theft deterrent measure in case NOTE: *The 2−step unlocking function can
of the loss of the wireless remote control be changed. **The turn signal lights can
key. Ask your Toyota dealer for details. be set not to flash. Ask your Toyota deal-
er for details.
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING THE SIDE
DOORS AND BACK DOOR Together with the activation of unlocking,
the interior light comes on for 15 seconds
To lock and unlock all the side doors
if the interior light switch is in “DOOR”
and back door, push the switches slow-
position.* However, this function does not
ly and securely. At this time, the indica- ”PANIC” SWITCH
work when the ignition key is in the “ACC”
tor light on the key grip flashes once.
or “ON” position. (For detailed information, Pushing the ”PANIC” switch for 1 sec-
To lock: Push the ”LOCK” switch. All the see “Interior light” on page 107.) ond blows the horn intermittently and
side doors and back door are locked si- flashes the headlights, tail lights and
You have 30 seconds to open a door after
multaneously. At this time, turn signal interior lights.*
using the wireless remote unlock fea-
lights flash once.*
ture.** If a door is not opened by then, all NOTE: *This feature can be deactivated.
NOTE: *The turn signal lights can be set the side doors and back door will be auto- Ask your Toyota dealer for details.
not to flash. Ask your Toyota dealer for matically locked again.
details. The ”PANIC” switch is used to deter ve-
NOTE: *The interior light can be set not hicle theft when you witness anyone at-
Check to see that all the side doors and to come on or the duration of lighting can tempting to break into or damage your
back door are securely locked. be changed. **The time before automatic vehicle.
If any of the side doors or back door is re−locking can be changed. Ask your
not securely closed, or if the key is in the Toyota dealer for details.
ignition switch, locking cannot be per- If the ”LOCK” or ”UNLOCK” switch is kept
formed by the ”LOCK” switch. pressed in, the locking or unlocking opera-
tion is not repeated. Release the switch
and then push again.
16
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

The alarm will last for 1 minute. To stop If the wireless remote control key does
the alarm midway, push the ”PANIC”, not actuate the doors or operate from a NOTICE:
“LOCK” or ”UNLOCK” switch, or unlock normal distance, or the indicator light on This equipment has been tested and
any side door or back door with key. You the key is dimmed or does not come on: found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part
can also stop the alarm by turning the  Check for closeness to a radio trans- 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
ignition key from ”LOCK” to the ”ON” posi- mitter such as a radio station or an
tion. designed to provide reasonable protec-
airport which can interfere with normal tion against harmful interference in a
The ”PANIC” mode does not work when operation of the key.
residential installation. This equipment
the ignition key is in the ”ON” position.  The battery may have been consumed. generates, uses and can radiate radio
WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL KEY Check the battery in the key. To frequency energy and, if not installed
The wireless remote control key is an replace the battery, see following and used in accordance with the instruc-
electronic component. Observe the follow- ”REPLACING THE BATTERY”. tions, may cause harmful interference to
ing instructions in order not to cause dam- If you lose your wireless remote control radio communications. However, there is
age and trouble on the key. key, contact your Toyota dealer as soon no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this
 Do not leave the key on places where as possible to avoid the possibility of
equipment does cause harmful interfer-
the temperature becomes high such as theft, or an accident. (For detailed infor-
mation, see “If you lose your keys” on ence to radio or television reception,
on the dashboard. which can be determined by turning the
page 246.)
 Do not disassemble it. equipment off and on, the user is en-
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
 Avoid knocking it hard against other couraged to try to correct the interfer-
objects or dropping it. ence by one or more of the following
This device complies with Part 15 of the measures:
 Avoid putting it in water. FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device  Reorient or relocate the receiving an-
You can use up to 4 wireless remote con- tenna.
trol keys for the same vehicle. Contact may not cause harmful interference, and
your Toyota dealer for detailed information. (2) this device must accept any interfer-  Increase the separation between the
ence received, including interference equipment and receiver.
that may cause undesired operation.

17
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

REPLACING THE BATTERY

 Connect the equipment into an outlet
For replacement, use a CR1616 lithium
on a circuit different from that to
battery or equivalent and a special screw-
which the receiver is connected.
driver.
 Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help. CAUTION
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not ex- Special care should be taken to pre-
pressly approved by the party respon- vent small children from swallowing
sible for compliance could void the the removed battery or components.
user’s authority to operate the equip-
ment.
NOTICE
z When replacing the terminal battery, 1. Remove the screw, and then the cover.
CAUTION be careful not to lose the compo-
nents.
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party respon- z Replace only with the same or
sible for compliance could void the equivalent type recommended by a
user’s authority to operate the equip- Toyota dealer.
ment. z Dispose of used battery according
to the local laws.

Replace the battery by following these

procedures:

18
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

4. Install the lid with the 2 screws.

5. Install the module into the key frame
and secure the cover with the screw.
6. When pushing any switch on the wire-
less key, make sure the indicator light
comes on.

NOTICE
z Make sure the positive side and
negative side of the battery are
faced correctly.
z Do not replace the battery with wet
hands. Water may cause unexpected
2. Remove the module from the key 3. Remove the 2 screws to take out the
rust.
frame. lid of the module. Take out the dis-
charged battery and put a new battery z Do not touch or move any compo-
with the positive side up. nents inside of the transmitter, or
it may interfere with proper opera-
NOTICE tion.
z Be careful not to bend the electrode
Do not bend the terminals.
of the battery insertion and that
dust or oils do not adhere to the
case.
z Take care not to lose the screws.
z Close the cover securely.

19
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Power windows

Window lock
switch

12C010 12C011

The windows can be operated with the Automatic operation: Push the switch OPERATING THE PASSENGERS’ WIN-
switch on each side door. completely down or pull it completely up, DOWS
The power windows work when the ignition and then release it. The window will fully Use the switch on each passenger’s
switch is in the ”ON” position. open or close. To stop the window part- door or the switches on the driver’s
way, lightly move the switch in the oppo- door that control each passenger’s win-
Key off operation: If both front doors are site direction and then release it.
closed, they work for 45 seconds even dow.
after the ignition switch is turned off. They Jam protection function: During automat- Normal operation: The window moves as
stop working when either front door is ic closing operation or key off closing op- long as you hold the switch.
opened. eration, the window stops and opens half-
way if something gets caught between the To open: Lightly push down the switch.
OPERATING THE DRIVER’S WINDOW window and window frame. To close: Lightly pull up the switch.
Use the switch on the driver’s door. If the window receives a strong impact, If you push in the window lock switch on
Normal operation: The window moves as this function may work even if nothing is the driver’s door, the passengers’ windows
long as you hold the switch. caught. cannot be operated.
To open: Lightly push down the switch. The indicator lights on the switch tell you
To close: Lightly pull up the switch. which of the switches can be operated.

20
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury, you

must do the following.
 Before you close the power win-
12C007a dows, always make sure there is
nobody around the power windows.
You must also make sure the
heads, hands and other parts of the
bodies of all occupants are kept
completely inside the vehicle. If
someone’s neck, head or hands get
caught in a closing window, it
Automatic operation: Push the switch could result in a serious injury.
completely down or pull it completely up, When anyone closes the power win-
and then release it. The window will fully dows, make sure he or she oper-
open or close. To stop the window part- ates the windows safely.
way, lightly move the switch in the oppo-  When small children are in the ve-
site direction and then release it. hicle, never let them use the power
Jam protection function: During automat- window switches without supervi-
ic closing operation or key off closing op- sion. Use the window lock switch to
eration, the window stops and opens half- prevent them from making unex-
way if something gets caught between the pected use of the switches.
window and window frame.  Be sure to remove the ignition key
If the window receives a strong impact, when you leave your vehicle.
this function may work even if nothing is
caught.

21
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Power quarter windows

 Never leave anyone (particularly a CAUTION

small child) alone in your vehicle,
especially with the ignition key still To avoid serious personal injury, you
inserted. Otherwise, he or she must do the following.
could use the power window  Before you close the power quarter
switches and get trapped in a win- windows, always make sure there is
dow. Unattended person (particular- nobody around the power quarter
ly a small child) can be involved in windows. You must also make sure
a serious accident. the hands and other parts of the
 Never try jamming any part of your bodies of all occupants are kept
body in a window to activate the completely inside the vehicle. If
jam protection function intention- someone’s hands get caught in a
ally. closing window, it could result in a
 The jam protection function may The rear quarter windows can be oper- serious injury. When anyone closes
not work if something gets caught ated with the ”REAR VENT” switches the power quarter windows, make
just before the window is fully on the instrument panel. sure he or she operates the win-
closed. The power rear quarter windows work dows safely.
when the ignition switch is in the ”ON”  Be sure to remove the ignition key
position. when you leave your vehicle.
Both left and right rear quarter windows  Never leave anyone (particularly a
move as long as you hold the switch. small child) alone in your vehicle,
To open: Push the right one of the especially with the ignition key still
switches. inserted. Otherwise, he or she
To close: Push the left one of the could use the power quarter win-
switches. dow switches and get trapped in a
window. Unattended person (particu-
larly a small child) can be involved
in a serious accident.

22
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Back door

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY Pull the handle and pull down the lower LOCKING AND UNLOCKING FROM IN-
Insert the key into the key hole and side of the back door. SIDE
turn it. When closing the back door, make sure To lock: Push the knob.
To lock: Turn the key clockwise. it is fully closed. To unlock: Pull the knob.
To unlock: Turn the key counterclockwise. See ”Luggage stowage precautions” on Operating the power door lock switch si-
All the doors lock and unlock simulta- page 203 for precautions when loading multaneously locks or unlocks the back
neously with back door. luggage. door. (See ”Side doors” on page 13.)

Operating the power door lock switch si-

multaneously locks or unlocks all the side
doors and back door. (See ”Side doors”
on page 13.)

23
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

CAUTION

 Keep the back door closed while

driving. This not only keeps the
luggage from being thrown out but
also prevents exhaust gases from
entering the vehicle.
 If the open back door hides the
stop and tail lights, rear turn signal
lights or rear retro reflectors while
you are parked, other road users
must be warned of the presence of
your vehicle by a warning triangle
Push the handle and push down the or other device. BACK DOOR CHILD−PROTECTOR
lower side of the back door. Move the lock lever to the ”LOCK”
When closing the back door, make sure position as shown on the label.
it is fully closed. This feature allows you to lock a back
See ”Luggage stowage precautions” on door so it can be opened from the outside
page 203 for precautions when loading only, not from inside. We recommend us-
luggage. ing this feature whenever small children
are in the vehicle.

24
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Hood

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the back

door is closed and locked, especially
when small children are in the ve-
hicle. Along with the proper use of
seat belts, locking the doors helps
prevent the driver and passengers
from being thrown out from the ve-
hicle during an accident. It also helps
prevent the doors from being opened
unintentionally.

To open the hood: 2. In front of the vehicle, pull up the

1. Pull the hood lock release lever. The auxiliary catch lever and lift the
hood will spring up slightly. hood.
Before closing the hood, check to see that
CAUTION you have not forgotten any tools, rags,
etc. Then lower the hood and make sure
Before driving, be sure that the hood it locks into place. If necessary, press
is closed and securely locked. Other- down gently on the front edge to lock it.
wise, the hood may open unexpected-
ly while driving and an accident may
occur.

25
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Theft deterrent system

The system will automatically be set after
30 seconds. When the system is set, the
indicator light will start flashing again.
4. After making sure the indicator light
starts flashing, you may leave the ve-
hicle.
Never leave anyone in the vehicle when
you set the system, because unlocking
from the inside will activate the system.
WHEN THE SYSTEM IS SET
Activating the system
The system will sound the alarm under
the following conditions:
To deter vehicle theft, the system is SETTING THE SYSTEM
designed to sound an alarm if any of 1. Turn the ignition key to the ”LOCK”  If any of the side doors is unlocked or
the side doors, back door or hood is opened without the key or wireless re-
position and remove it.
forcibly unlocked or opened or the bat- mote control key, or if the back door
tery terminal is disconnected and then The indicator light will start flashing when or hood is forcibly opened
the key is removed from the ignition
reconnected when the vehicle is locked.
switch. (See ”Engine immobiliser system”  If the battery terminal is disconnected
The alarm blows the horn intermittently on page 12 for details.) and then reconnected
and flashes the headlights, tail lights and The indicator light will come on when the
other exterior lights. 2. Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle. system is activating.

3. Close and lock all the side doors, back

door and hood.
The indicator light will come on when all
the side doors, back door and hood are
closed and locked.

26
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Fuel tank cap

If any of the side door or back door is TESTING THE SYSTEM
unlocked without the key or wireless re- 1. Open all the windows.
mote control key and the key is not in the
ignition switch, all the side doors and 2. Set the system as described above.
back door will be automatically locked The side doors and back door should
again. be locked with the key or wireless re-
mote control key. Be sure to wait until
After one minute, the alarm will automati- the indicator light goes off or starts 12C503
cally stop and the indicator light will starts flashing.
flashing again.
3. Unlock any side door or back door
Reactivating the alarm from the inside. The system should ac-
Once set, the system automatically resets tivate the alarm.
the alarm after the alarm stops. 4. Stopping the alarm as described above.
The alarm will activate again under the 5. Repeat this operation for the other
same circumstances described in This indicates that the fuel filler door
doors, back door and hood. When test- is on the left side of your vehicle.
”Activating the system”. ing the hood, also check that the sys-
Stopping the alarm tem is activated when the battery ter-
The alarm will be stopped by the following minal is disconnected and then
two ways: reconnected.

 Turn the ignition key from the ”LOCK” If the system does not work properly,
to ”ON” position. have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

 Unlock any of the side doors or back

door with the key or wireless remote
control key.
These ways cancel the system at the
same time.

27
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

CAUTION

 Make sure the cap is tightened se-

curely to prevent fuel spillage in
case of an accident.
 Use only a genuine Toyota fuel tank
12C006 cap for replacement. It is designed
to regulate fuel tank pressure.

1. To open the fuel filler door, pull the 2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turn
lever. the cap slowly counterclockwise,
When refueling, turn off the engine. then pause slightly before removing
it. After removing the cap, hang it
on the cap hanger.
CAUTION
It is not unusual to hear a slight swoosh
 Do not smoke, cause sparks or al- when the cap is opened. When installing,
low open flames when refueling. turn the cap clockwise till you hear a
The fumes are flammable. click.
 When opening the cap, do not re- If the cap is not tightened securely, the
move the cap quickly. In hot weath- malfunction indicator lamp comes on.
er, fuel under pressure could cause Make sure the cap is tightened securely.
injury by spraying out of the filler
neck if the cap is suddenly re-
moved.

28
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Electric moon roof

To operate the moon roof, use the The roof will fully close. To stop the roof
switches beside the personal light. partway, push the same switch or tilt
The moon roof works when the ignition switch.
switch is in the ”ON” position. However, Tilting operation—
if both front doors are closed, it works for To tilt up: Push the switch on the ”UP”
45 seconds even after the ignition switch side.
is turned off. It stops working when either
of the front doors is opened. The roof will tilt up fully. To stop the roof
partway, push the same switch or slide
Sun shade operation— switch.
The sun shade can be opened or closed To lower: Push the switch on the opposite
by hand. side of the ”UP” side.
Sliding operation— The roof will fully close. To stop the roof
Sliding operation To open: Push the switch on the rear partway, push the same switch or slide
side. switch.
The roof will open and stop partway 30 Jam protection function (closing opera-
mm (1.2 in.) from the fully opened posi- tion only): During closing operation, the
tion. When you push the switch again, the moon roof stops and opens halfway if
moon roof will open fully. To stop the roof something gets caught between the moon
partway, push the same switch or tilt roof and frame.
switch while the roof is moving. If an impact is given to the moon roof,
As driving with the moon roof opened fully this function may work without anything
will cause wind throbs, we recommend caught.
you to drive with the moon roof partway
30 mm (1.2 in.) from the fully opened
position.
The sun shade will be opened together
with the roof.
Tilting operation
To close: Push the switch on the front
side.
29
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

CAUTION  Never leave anyone (particularly a

small child) alone in your vehicle,
To avoid serious personal injury, you especially with the ignition key still
must do the following. inserted. Otherwise, he or she
 While the vehicle is moving, always could use the moon roof switches
keep the heads, hands and other and get trapped in the roof open-
parts of the bodies of all occupants ing. Unattended person (particularly
away from the roof opening. Other- a small child) can be involved in a
wise, they could be seriously in- serious accident.
jured if the vehicle stops suddenly  Never sit on top of the vehicle
or if the vehicle is involved in an around the roof opening.
accident.  Never try jamming any part of your
 Before you close the moon roof, body to activate the jam protection
always make sure there is nobody function intentionally.
around the moon roof. You must  The jam protection function may
also make sure nobody places his not work when something gets
or her head, hands and other parts caught just before the moon roof is
of the body in the roof opening. If fully closed.
someone’s neck, head or hands get
caught in the closing roof, it could
result in a serious injury. When
anyone closes the moon roof, first
make sure it is safe to do so.
 Be sure to remove the ignition key
when you leave your vehicle.

30
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

SECTION 1− 3
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Seats, Seat belts, Steering wheel and Mirrors
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Seat heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
SRS driver and front passenger airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
SRS side and curtain shield airbags with roll sensing function . . . . 64
Child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Power tilt and telescopic steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Outside rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Anti−glare inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

31
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Front seats—
—Front seat precautions
Seats (on vehicles with SRS front airbags)
While the vehicle is being driven, all ve- Driver seat
hicle occupants should have the seatback  Slightly recline the back of the
upright, sit well back in the seat and prop- CAUTION seat. Although vehicle designs vary,
erly wear the seat belts provided. many drivers can achieve the 250
The SRS driver airbag deploys with mm (10 in.) distance, even with the
CAUTION considerable force, and can cause driver seat all the way forward, sim-
death or serious injury especially if ply by reclining the back of the
 Do not drive the vehicle unless the the driver is very close to the airbag. seat somewhat. If reclining the back
occupants are properly seated. Do The National Highway Traffic Safety of your seat makes it hard to see
not allow passengers to sit on top Administration (”NHTSA”) advises: the road, raise yourself by using a
of a folded−down seatback, or in firm, non−slippery cushion, or raise
Since the risk zone for driver airbag the seat if your vehicle has that
the luggage compartment or cargo is the first 50−75 mm (2−3 in.) of
area. Persons not properly seated feature.
inflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10
and/or not properly restrained by in.) from your driver airbag provides  If your steering wheel is adjustable,
seat belts can be severely injured you with a clear margin of safety. tilt it downward. This points the air-
in the event of emergency braking This distance is measured from the bag toward your chest instead of
or a collision. center of the steering wheel to your your head and neck.
 During driving, do not allow pas- breastbone. If you sit less than 250 The seat should be adjusted as rec-
sengers to stand up or move mm (10 in.) away now, you can ommended by NHTSA above, while
around between seats. Otherwise, change your driving position in sever- still maintaining control of the foot
severe injuries can occur in the al ways: pedals, steering wheel, and your view
event of emergency braking or a  Move your seat to the rear as far of the instrument panel controls.
collision. as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.

32
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Front seat precautions —Seat adjustment

(on vehicles with SRS side airbags) precautions
Front passenger seat
CAUTION CAUTION
CAUTION
The SRS side airbags are installed in  Adjustments should not be made
The SRS front passenger airbag also the driver and front passenger seats. while the vehicle is moving, as the
Observe the following precautions. seat may unexpectedly move and
deploys with considerable force, and
cause the driver to lose control of
can cause death or serious injury es-  Do not lean against the front door
the vehicle.
pecially if the front passenger is very when the vehicle is in use, since
close to the airbag. The front passen- the side airbag inflates with consid-  When adjusting the seat, be careful
ger seat should be as far from the erable speed and force. Otherwise, that the seat does not hit a passen-
ger or luggage.
airbag as possible with the seatback you may be killed or seriously in-
adjusted, so the front passenger sits jured.  After adjusting the seat position, re-
upright. lease the lever and try sliding the
 Do not use seat accessories which seat forward and backward to make
cover the area where the side air- sure it is locked in position.
bags inflate. Such accessories may  After adjusting the seatback, push
prevent the side airbags from acti- your body back against the seat to
vating correctly, causing death or make sure the seat is locked in
serious injury. position.
 Do not modify or replace the seats  Do not put objects under the seats.
or upholstery of front seats with Otherwise, the objects may interfere
side airbags. Such changes may with the seat−lock mechanism or
prevent the side airbags from acti- unexpectedly push up the seat posi-
vating correctly, disable the system tion adjusting lever and the seat
or cause the side airbags to inflate may suddenly move, causing the
accidentally, resulting in death or driver to lose control of the vehicle.
serious injury.

33
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Adjusting front seats

1. SEAT POSITION AND SEAT CUSHION
 While adjusting the seat, do not put ANGLE ADJUSTING SWITCH
your hands under the seat or near
the moving parts. Otherwise, your Move the control switch in the desired
hands or fingers may be caught and direction.
injured. Releasing the switch will stop the seat at
that position.
Do not place anything under the front
seats, as this might interfere with the seat
movement.
2. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING
SWITCH
Move the control switch in the desired
direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the seat-
back at that position.

34
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Rear seats—
Armrest —Rear seat precautions

CAUTION CAUTION

To reduce the risk of sliding under  Adjustments should not be made

the lap belt during a collision, avoid while the vehicle is moving.
reclining the seatback any more than  When adjusting the seat, be careful
needed. The seat belts provide maxi- that the seat does not hit a passen-
mum protection in a frontal or rear ger or luggage.
collision when the driver and the pas-
senger are sitting up straight and  After adjusting the seatback, push
well back in the seats. If you are your body back against the seat to
reclined, the lap belt may slide past make sure the seat is locked in
your hips and apply restraint forces position.
directly to the abdomen. In the event  When returning seats to their origi-
of a frontal collision, the more the To use the armrest, pull it down as nal position, observe the following
seat is reclined, the greater the risk shown above. in order to prevent personal injury
of personal injuries. in a collision or sudden stop:
NOTICE Make sure the seat is securely
3. SEAT LUMBAR SUPPORT ADJUST- locked by pushing forward and rear-
To prevent damage to the armrest,
ING SWITCH ward on the top of the seatback
avoid putting heavy loads on it.
Push the control switch on either side. and by trying to pull up the edge
of the bottom cushion. Failure to
The amount of lumbar support will change do so will prevent seat belt from
while the switch is pushed. operating properly.
Make sure the seat belts are not
twisted or caught under the seat
and are arranged in their proper
position and are ready to use.

35
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Adjusting second seats

Folding the seats up will enlarge the lug- SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING LEVER
gage compartment. See ”Luggage stowage Lean forward and pull the lever toward
precautions” on page 203 for precautions you. Then lean back to the desired
when loading luggage. angle and release the lever.

CAUTION

 To reduce the risk of sliding under

the lap belt during a collision,
avoid reclining the seatback any
more than needed. The seat belts
provide maximum protection in a
frontal or rear collision when the
passengers are sitting up straight
and well back in the seats. If you
are reclined, the lap belt may slide
past your hips and apply restraint
forces directly to the abdomen.
Therefore, in the event of a frontal
collision, the risk of personal injury
may increase with increasing recline
of the seatback.
 Adjustments should not be made
while the vehicle is moving.
 After adjusting the seatback, push
your body back against the seat to
make sure the seat is locked in
position.

36
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Moving second seat for

third seat entry —Folding up second seat

CAUTION

After returning the seat, make sure

the seat is securely locked by push-
ing forward and rearward on the top
of the seatback and by trying to pull
up the edge of the bottom cushion.

For easy access to the third seat, do BEFORE FOLDING UP SECOND SEAT
this; 1. Stow the second seat belt buckles
1. Lower the head restraint to the low- as shown in the illustration.
est position. This prevents the seat belt buckles from
2. Push the seatback angle adjusting falling out when you fold up the second
lever and pull the seat cushion lock seat.
release lever or pull the strap.
NOTICE
After passengers are in, return the seat
until it locks. The seat belt buckles must be stowed
before you fold up the second seat.

37
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

2. Make sure the shoulder belt passes FOLDING UP SECOND SEAT 2. Unlock the seat cushion. Swing the
through the hanger when folding the 1. Lower the outer head restraint to the whole seat up and forward.
second seat. lowest position and pull up the cen-
This prevents the shoulder belt from being ter head restraint. Unlock the seat-
damaged. back and fold it down.
Vehicles without third seats—Folding up
CAUTION the rear seats will enlarge the luggage
compartment. See ”Luggage stowage pre-
The seat belt must be removed from cautions” on page 203 for precautions
the hanger when the seat belt is in when loading luggage.
use.

38
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

3. Hook the strap. 4. Remove the seat hook covers from WHEN RETURNING THE SECOND SEAT
When returning the second seat to its the back of the seat cushion, and If you cannot raise the seatback be-
original position, put the holding strap into install them over the seat hooks. cause of the locked seat belt, do not
the hole. try it hard. Release the lock of the seat
CAUTION belt in the following way. Push in the
lower front edge of the seatback cush-
Be sure to apply the covers on the ion to slacken the seat belt (1) and let
seat hooks, or you may get burned the seat belt retract a little (2).
when they become hot.

When returning the second seat to its

original position, remove the seat hook
covers from the floor and install them in
the back of the seat cushion.

39
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Adjusting third seats

SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING LEVER
CAUTION
Lean forward and pull the lever toward
you. Then lean back to the desired
When returning seats to their original
angle and release the lever.
position, observe the following pre-
cautions in order to prevent personal
injury in a collision or sudden stop: CAUTION
 Make sure the seat is securely  To reduce the risk of sliding under
locked by pushing forward and rear- the lap belt during a collision,
ward on the top of the seatback avoid reclining the seatback any
and by trying to pull up the edge more than needed. The seat belts
of the bottom cushion. Failure to provide maximum protection in a
do so will prevent seat belt from frontal or rear collision when the
operating properly. passengers are sitting up straight
 Make sure the seat belts are not and well back in the seats. If you
twisted or caught under the seat are reclined, the lap belt may slide
and are arranged in their proper past your hips and apply restraint
position and are ready to use. forces directly to the abdomen.
Therefore, in the event of a frontal
collision, the risk of personal injury
may increase with increasing recline
of the seatback.
 Adjustments should not be made
while the vehicle is moving.
 After adjusting the seatback, push
your body back against the seat to
make sure the seat is locked in
position.

40
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Folding up third seats

BEFORE FOLDING UP THIRD SEAT 2. Make sure the shoulder belt passes FOLDING UP THIRD SEAT
1. Stow the third seat belt and buckles through the hanger when folding the 1. Lower the head restraint to the low-
as shown in the illustration. third seat. est position. Unlock the seatback
This prevents the seat belt and buckles This prevents the shoulder belt from being and fold it down.
from falling out when you fold up the third damaged. Folding up the third seats will enlarge the
seat. luggage compartment. See ”Luggage stow-
CAUTION age precautions” on page 203 for precau-
NOTICE tions when loading luggage.
The seat belt must be removed from
The seat belt and buckles must be the hanger when the seat belt is in
stowed before you fold up the third use.
seat.

41
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

2. Unlock the seat cushion and slide 3. Swing the whole seat up. 4. Hook the strap.
the whole seat to the rear−most When returning the third seat to its origi-
position while pulling up the handle. nal position, put the holding strap into the
hole.

42
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Removing third seats

CAUTION

When returning seats to their original

position, observe the following pre-
cautions in order to prevent personal
injury in a collision or sudden stop:
 Make sure the seat is securely
locked by pushing forward and rear-
ward on the top of the seatback
and by trying to pull up the edge
of the bottom cushion. Be certain
to replace head restraint. Failure to
do so will prevent seat belt from
5. Remove the seat hook covers from operating properly. After folding up the third seat, open the
the back of the seat cushion, and  Make sure the seat belts are not cover, hold the whole seat and pull it
install them over the seat hooks. twisted or caught under the seat up while pulling the handle toward you.
and are arranged in their proper Removing the third seat will enlarge the
CAUTION position and are ready to use. luggage compartment. See ”Luggage stow-
age precautions” on page 203 for precau-
Be sure to apply the covers on the tions when loading luggage.
seat hooks, or you may get burned
when they become hot.

When returning the third seat to its origi-

nal position, remove the seat hook covers
from the floor and install them in the back
of the seat cushion.

43
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

CAUTION  When reinstalling the seat, be care-

ful not to hit the seat against you
When removing or reinstalling the or inside of the vehicle.
seat, observe the following precau-  Install each seat in the same posi-
tions to prevent personal injury: tion from which it was removed.
 Do not fold or remove the seat Failure to do so will prevent third
while the vehicle is moving. seat occupants from using seat
 Be careful not to get your hands or belts properly.
feet pinched in the seat.
 Be careful not to hit the removed NOTICE
seat against a person or drop it on
yourself. Avoid putting heavy loads on the re-
moved seat. The metallic tips of the
Remove the seat hook covers from the  After folding or installing the seat,
seat legs may be damaged and the
back of the seat cushion, and install push it forward and backward to
seat cannot be reinstalled.
them over the seat hooks. make sure it is locked in position.
To prevent personal injury in a colli-
CAUTION sion or sudden stop:

Be sure to apply the covers on the  Do not sit on or place anything on

seat hooks, or you may get burned the folded seatback while driving.
when they become hot.  Do not leave the removed seat
loose in the vehicle.
When returning the third seat to its origi-  Do not try to sit on or place any-
nal position, remove the seat hook covers thing on the removed seat.
from the floor and install them in the back
of the seat cushion.

44
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Head restraints Seat heaters

For your safety and comfort, adjust the Right side
head restraint before driving. front seat
To raise: Pull it up.
To lower: Push it down while pressing the
lock release button.
Front head restraint only—You can also
move the head restraint forward or back-
ward. If such adjustment is desired, pull
or push the head restraint. Left side
front seat
Rear center head restraint—When an oc-
cupant sits on the rear center seat, al-
ways pull up the rear center head re-
straint to the lock position.
Front
The head restraint is most effective when To turn on the seat heater, push the
it is close to your head. Therefore, using switch to ”HI” (high heating tempera-
a cushion on the seatback is not recom- ture) or ”LO” (low heating temperature).
mended. The key must be in the ”ON” position.
Pushing lightly on the opposite side will
CAUTION turn it off.
 Adjust the center of the head re-
straint so that it is closest to the
top of your ears.
 After adjusting the head restraint,
make sure it is locked in position.
 Do not drive with the head re-
straints removed.
Rear

45
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Seat belts—
—Seat belt precautions
Toyota strongly urges that the driver and
CAUTION NOTICE
passengers in the vehicle be properly re-
z Do not put unevenly weighed ob- strained at all times with the seat belts
Occupants must use caution when op- provided. Failure to do so could increase
jects on the seat and do not stick
erating the seat heater because it the chance of injury and/or the severity of
sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.)
may make them feel too hot or cause injury in accidents.
into the seat.
burns at low temperatures (erythema,
z When cleaning the seats, do not The seat belts provided for your vehicle
varicella). Use extra caution for;
use organic substances (paint thin- are designed for people of adult size,
 Babies, small children, elderly per- ner, benzine, alcohol, gasoline, large enough to properly wear them.
sons, sick persons or handicapped
etc.). They may damage the heater Child. Use a child restraint system ap-
persons
and seat surface. propriate for the child until the child be-
 Persons who have delicate skin z To prevent the battery from being comes large enough to properly wear the
 Persons who are exhausted discharged, turn the switch off vehicle’s seat belts. (For details, see
”Child restraint” on page 74.)
 Persons who have taken alcohol or when the engine is not running.
drugs which induce sleep (sleeping If a child is too large for a child restraint
drug, cold remedy, etc.) system, the child should sit in the rear
seat and must be restrained using the
To prevent the seat from overheating,
vehicle’s seat belt. According to accident
do not use the seat heater with a
statistics, the child is safer when properly
blanket, cushion, or other insulating
restrained in the rear seat than in the
objects which cover the seat.
front seat.
If a child must sit in the front seat, the
seat belts should be worn properly. If an
accident occurs and the seat belts are not
worn properly, the force of the rapid infla-
tion of the airbag may cause death or
serious injury to the child.

46
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Do not allow the child to stand up or

kneel on either rear or front seats. An CAUTION  Keep the belts clean and dry. If
unrestrained child could suffer serious in- they need cleaning, use a mild soap
jury or death during emergency braking or Persons should ride in their seats solution or lukewarm water. Never
a collision. Also, do not let the child sit properly wearing their seat belts use bleach, dye, or abrasive clean-
on your lap. It does not provide sufficient whenever the vehicle is moving. ers—they may severely weaken the
restraint. Otherwise, they are much more likely belts. (See ”Cleaning the interior”
to suffer serious bodily injury or on page 251.)
Pregnant woman. Toyota recommends the
use of a seat belt. Ask your doctor for
death in the event of sudden braking  Replace the belt assembly (includ-
or a collision. ing bolts) if it has been used in a
specific recommendations. The lap belt
should be worn securely and as low as When using the seat belts, observe severe impact. The entire assembly
possible over the hips and not on the the following: should be replaced even if damage
waist.  Use the belt for only one person at is not obvious.
Injured person. Toyota recommends the a time. Do not use a single belt for
use of a seat belt. Depending on the inju- two or more people—even children.
ry, first check with your doctor for specific  Avoid reclining the seatbacks too
recommendations. much. The seat belts provide maxi-
mum protection when the seatbacks
are in the upright position. (Refer
to the seat adjustment instructions.)
 Be careful not to damage the belt
webbing or hardware. Take care that
they do not get caught or pinched
in the seat or doors.
 Inspect the belt system periodically.
Check for cuts, fraying, and loose
parts. Damaged parts should be re-
placed. Do not disassemble or
modify the system.

47
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—3−point seat belts

If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the
retractor, firmly pull the belt and release
it. You will then be able to smoothly pull
the belt out of the retractor.
When the shoulder belt is completely ex-
tended and is then retracted even slightly,
the belt is locked in that position and
cannot be extended. This feature is used
to hold the child restraint system securely.
(For details, see ”Child restraint” on page
74.) To free the belt again, fully retract
the belt and then pull the belt out once
more.

Adjust the seat as needed and sit up CAUTION Seat belts with an adjustable shoulder
straight and well back in the seat. To anchor—
fasten your belt, pull it out of the re-  After inserting the tab, make sure Adjust the shoulder anchor position to
tractor and insert the tab into the the tab and buckle are locked and your size.
buckle. that the belt is not twisted. To raise: Slide the anchor up.
You will hear a click when the tab locks  Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in To lower: Push in the lock release button
into the buckle. the buckle as this may prevent you and slide the anchor down.
The seat belt length automatically adjusts from properly latching the tab and After adjustment, make sure the anchor is
to your size and the seat position. buckle. locked in position.
The retractor will lock the belt during a  If the seat belt does not function
sudden stop or on impact. It also may normally, immediately contact your
lock if you lean forward too quickly. A Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat
slow easy motion will allow the belt to until the seat belt is fixed. It cannot
extend, and you can move around freely. protect an adult occupant or your
child from injury.

48
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

CAUTION CAUTION
Take up slack
Always make sure the shoulder belt  Both high−positioned lap belts and
is positioned across the center of loose−fitting belts could cause seri-
your shoulder. The belt should be Too high ous injuries due to sliding under the
kept away from your neck, but not lap belt during a collision or other
falling off your shoulder. Failure to unintended result. Keep the lap belt
do so could reduce the amount of positioned as low on hips as pos-
protection in an accident and cause sible.
serious injuries in a collision.  For your safety, do not place the
Keep as low on hips as possible shoulder belt under your arm.

Adjust the position of the lap and

shoulder belts.
Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips–not on your waist, then ad-
just it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulder
portion upward through the latch plate.

49
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—2−point seat belt

Lengthen CAUTION

 After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt is not twisted.
 Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent you
from properly latching the tab and
buckle.
 If the seat belt does not function
normally, immediately contact your
Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat
To release the belt, press the buckle−re- Sit up straight and well back in the until the seat belt is fixed. It cannot
lease button and allow the belt to re- seat. To fasten your belt, insert the tab protect an adult occupant or your
tract. into the buckle. child from injury.
If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull You will hear a click when the tab locks
it out and check for kinks or twists. Then into the buckle.
make sure it remains untwisted as it re- If the belt is not long enough for you, hold
tracts. the tab at a right angle to the belt and
pull on the tab.

50
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Seat belt extender

If your seat belt cannot be fastened se-
Too high curely because it is not long enough, a
personalized seat belt extender is avail-
able from your Toyota dealer free of
charge.
Please contact your local Toyota dealer to
Adjust to a snug fit order the proper required length for the
extender. Bring the heaviest coat you ex-
pect to wear for proper measurement and
selection of length. Additional ordering in-
formation is available at your Toyota deal-
Keep as low on hips as possible er.

CAUTION
Remove excess length of the belt and To release the belt, press the buckle−re-
adjust the belt position. lease button. When using the seat belt extender,
To shorten the belt, pull the free end of observe the following precautions.
the belt. Failure to follow these instructions
Position the lap belt as low as possible could reduce the effectiveness of the
on your hips—not on your waist, then ad- seat belt restraint system in case of
just it to a snug fit. vehicle accident, increasing the
chance of personal injury.
CAUTION  Never use the seat belt extender if
you can fasten the seat belt without
Both high−positioned and loose−fit- it.
ting lap belts could cause serious in-
juries due to sliding under the lap belt
during a collision or other unintended
result. Keep the lap belt positioned as
low on hips as possible.

51
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

 Remember that the extender pro- CAUTION

vided for you may not be safe when
used on a different vehicle, for  After inserting the tab, make sure
another person, or at a different the tab and buckle are locked and
seating position than the one origi- that the lap and shoulder portions
nally intended. of the belt is not twisted.
 Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent you
from properly latching the tab and
buckle.
 If the seat belt does not function
normally, immediately contact your
Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat
To connect the extender to the seat until the seat belt is fixed. It cannot
belt, insert the tab into the seat belt protect an adult occupant or your
buckle so that the ”PRESS” signs on child from injury.
the buckle−release buttons of the ex-
tender and the seat belt are both facing
outward as shown.
You will hear a click when the tab locks
into the buckle.
When releasing the seat belt, press on
the buckle−release button on the extender,
not on the seat belt. This helps prevent
damage to the vehicle interior and extend-
er itself.
When not in use, remove the extender
and store in the vehicle for future use.

52
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Front seat belt pretensioners

Collisions occurring at certain speeds and
angles may cause the seat belt preten-
sioners and SRS airbags not to operate
all together.

Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off

The driver and front passenger’s seat indicator light
belt pretensioners are designed to be
activated in response to a severe fron-
tal impact or a vehicle rollover. The seat belt pretensioners will not oper-
ate in a vehicle rollover if the roll sensing
When the airbag sensor detects the shock of curtain shield airbags off indicator light
of a severe frontal impact or a vehicle is on. For details, see ”Roll sensing of
rollover, the front seat belts are quickly curtain shield airbags off switch” on page
drawn back by the retractor so that the 65.
belts snugly restrain the front seat occu-
pants.
The front seat belt pretensioners are acti-
vated even with no passenger in the front
seat.

53
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

CAUTION

 Make sure the roll sensing of cur-

tain shield airbags off indicator
light is not on.
 When the roll sensing of curtain
shield airbags off switch is turned
on (and the roll sensing of curtain
shield airbags off indicator light is
on), the seat belt pretensioners will
not operate in a vehicle rollover
and turning off the seat belt preten-
sioners can reduce the occupant
protection which your vehicle safety This indicator comes on when the igni- The front seat belt pretensioner system
systems can provide to you in cer- tion key is turned to the ”ON” position. mainly consists of the following compo-
tain accidents and increase the like- It goes off after about 6 seconds. This nents, and their locations are shown in
lihood of death or serious injuries. means the front seat belt pretensioners the illustration.
are operating properly. 1. Front airbag sensors
This warning light system monitors the 2. SRS warning light
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-
sors, side and curtain shield airbag sensor 3. Seat belt pretensioner assemblies
assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor 4. Airbag sensor assembly
assemblies, driver’s seat position sensor, The front seat belt pretensioners are con-
driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front seat trolled by the airbag sensor assembly. The
belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, airbag sensor assembly consists of a saf-
warning light, interconnecting wiring and ing sensor and airbag sensor.
power sources. (For details, see ”Service
reminder indicators and warning buzzers”
on page 118.)

54
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

When the front seat belt pretensioners are

activated, an operating noise may be  Do not place luggage heavier than NOTICE
heard and a small amount of smoke−like specified on the roof luggage carri-
Do not perform any of the following
gas may be released. This gas is harm- er. Such luggage may cause the
changes without first consulting your
less and does not indicate that a fire is curtain shield airbags and seat belt Toyota dealer. Such changes can
occurring. pretensioners to inflate accidentally, interfere with proper operation of the
Once the front seat belt pretensioners which could result in death or seri- front seat belt pretensioners in some
have been activated, the seat belt retrac- ous injury. For details, see ”Roof cases.
tors remain locked. luggage carrier” on page 188.
z Installation of electronic devices
 Do not modify or change the sus- such as a mobile two−way radio,
CAUTION pension system. Such changes may cassette tape player or compact
cause the curtain shield airbags to disc player
 Do not modify, remove, strike or inflate accidentally, which could re-
z Repairs on or near the front seat
open the front seat belt pretension- sult in death or serious injury.
belt retractor assemblies
er assemblies, airbag sensor or sur- Failure to follow these instructions
rounding area or wiring. Doing any can result in death or serious inju- z Modification of the front end struc-
of these may cause sudden opera- ries. Consult your Toyota dealer be- ture
tion of the front seat belt preten- fore performing any repairs and modi- z Attachment of a grille guard (bull
sioners or disable the system, fications. bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,
which could result in death or seri- winches or any other equipment to
ous injury. the front end
 Do not use tires or wheels other z Repairs made on or near the front
than the manufacturer’s recom- fenders, front end structure or con-
mended size. Such a use may cause sole
the curtain shield airbags and seat
belt pretensioners to inflate acci-
dentally, which could result in death
or serious injury. For details, see
”Checking and replacing tires” on
page 275.

55
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

 The seat belt pretensioner assembly or

surrounding area has been damaged.

This front seat belt pretensioner system In the following cases, contact your Toyota
has a service reminder indicator to inform dealer as soon as possible:
the driver of operating problems. If either  The front of the vehicle (shaded in the
of the following conditions occurs, this illustration) was involved in an accident
indicates a malfunction of the airbags or that was not severe enough to cause
pretensioners. Contact your Toyota dealer the front seat belt pretensioners to op-
as soon as possible to service the erate.
vehicle.
 Either front seat belt pretensioner as-
 When the ignition switch is turned to sembly or surrounding area is
the “ON” position, the light does not scratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-
come on or flashes. aged.
 The light flashes while driving.
 If any seat belt does not retract or
cannot be pulled out due to a malfunc-
tion or activation of the relevant seat
belt pretensioner.

56
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

SRS driver and front

passenger airbags
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash
sensing and diagnostic module, which will
record the use of the seat belt restraint
system by the driver when the SRS front
airbags are inflated.

CAUTION

A driver or front passenger who is

too close to the steering wheel or
dashboard during airbag deployment
can be killed or seriously injured.
Toyota strongly recommends that:
 The driver sit as far back as pos-
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys- sible from the steering wheel while This indicator comes on when the igni-
tem) front airbags are designed to pro- still maintaining control of the ve- tion key is turned to the ”ON” position.
vide further protection for the driver hicle. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This
and front passenger in addition to the means the SRS front airbags are oper-
primary safety protection provided by  The front passenger sit as far back ating properly.
the seat belts. as possible from the dashboard.
This warning light system monitors the
In response to a severe frontal impact,  All vehicle occupants be properly airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-
the SRS front airbags work together with restrained using the available seat sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-
the seat belts to help reduce injury by belts. sors assembly, curtain shield airbag sen-
inflating. The SRS front airbags help to sor assemblies, driver’s seat position
reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s or sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch,
front passenger’s head or chest directly front seat belt pretensioner assemblies,
hitting the steering wheel or dashboard. inflators, warning light, interconnecting wir-
The front passenger airbag is activated ing and power sources. (For details, see
even with no passenger in the front seat. ”Service reminder indicators and warning
Be sure to wear your seat belt properly. buzzers” on page 118.)

57
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

The SRS front airbags are designed to

deploy in severe (usually frontal) colli-
sions where the magnitude and duration
of the forward deceleration of the ve-
Hitting a curb, Falling into or
hicle exceeds the designed threshold edge of pavement
level. Collision from the rear jumping over a
or hard surface deep hole
The SRS front airbags will deploy if the
severity of the impact is above the de-
signed threshold level, comparable to an
approximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision Collision from the side
when the vehicle has the impact straight
into a fixed barrier that does not move or Vehicle rollover Landing hard or vehicle falling
deform.
However, this threshold velocity will be
The SRS front airbags are generally not The SRS front airbags may also deploy
considerably higher if the vehicle strikes designed to inflate if the vehicle is in- if a severe impact occurs to the under-
an object, such as a parked vehicle or
volved in a side or rear collision, if it side of your vehicle. Some examples
sign pole, which can move or deform on
rolls over, or if it is involved in a low− are shown in the illustration.
impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an speed frontal collision.
underride collision (e.g. a collision in
which the front of the vehicle ”underrides”,
or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).
It is possible that in some collisions
where the forward deceleration of the ve-
hicle is very close to the designed thresh-
old level, the SRS front airbags and the
seat belt pretensioners may not activate
together.
For the safety of all occupants, always
wear your seat belts properly.

58
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

The airbag sensors constantly monitor the Deployment of the airbags happens in a
forward deceleration of the vehicle. If an fraction of a second, so the airbags must
impact results in a forward deceleration inflate with considerable force. While the
beyond the designed threshold level, the system is designed to reduce serious inju-
system triggers the airbag inflators. At this ries, primarily to the head and chest, it
time a chemical reaction in the inflators may also cause other, less severe injuries
very quickly fills the airbags with non−tox- to the face, chest, arms and hands. These
ic gas to help restrain the forward motion are usually in the nature of minor burns
of the occupants. The airbags then quickly or abrasions and swelling, but the force of
deflate, so that there is no obstruction of a deploying airbag can cause more seri-
the driver’s vision should it be necessary ous injuries, especially if an occupant’s
to continue driving. hands, arms, chest or head are in close
When the airbags inflate, they produce a proximity to the airbag module at the time
fairly loud noise and release some smoke of deployment. This is why it is important
The SRS front airbag system mainly con- and residue along with non−toxic gas. This for the occupant to: avoid placing any
sists of the following components, and does not indicate a fire. This gas is nor- object or part of the body between the
their locations are shown in the illustra- mally harmless; however, for those who occupant and the airbag module; sit
tion. have delicate skin, it may cause a minor straight and well back into the seat; wear
skin irritation. Be sure to wash off any the available seat belt properly; and sit as
1. Front airbag sensors
residue as soon as possible to prevent far as possible from the airbag module,
2. SRS warning light while still maintaining control of the ve-
any potential skin irritation.
3. Airbag module for front passenger hicle.
(airbag and inflator) Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel
4. Airbag sensor assembly hub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hot
for several minutes after deployment, so
5. Airbag module for driver
do not touch! The airbags inflate only
(airbag and inflator)
once. The windshield may be damaged by
6. Driver’s seat position sensor absorbing some of the force of the inflat-
7. Driver’s seat belt buckle switch ing airbag.
The airbag sensor assembly consists of a
safing sensor and airbag sensor.
59
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

CAUTION  Improperly seated and/or restrained

infants and children can be killed
 The SRS airbag system is designed or seriously injured by the deploy-
only as a supplement to the prima- ing front airbags. An infant or child
ry protection of the driver’s and who is too small to use a seat belt
front passenger’s seat belt systems. should be properly secured using a
The front seat occupants can be child restraint system. Toyota
killed or seriously injured by the strongly recommends that all in-
inflating airbags if they do not wear fants and children be placed in the
the available seat belts properly. rear seat of the vehicle and proper-
During sudden braking just before ly restrained. The rear seat is the
a collision, an unrestrained driver safest for infants and children. For
or front passenger can move for- instructions concerning the installa-
ward into direct contact with or
tion of a child restraint system, see
close proximity to the airbag which
may then deploy during the colli-
”Child restraint” on page 74.  Never put a rear−facing child re-
straint system on the front passen-
sion. To ensure maximum protection
ger seat because the force of the
in an accident, the driver and all
rapid inflation of the front passen-
passengers in the vehicle must
ger airbag can cause death or seri-
wear their seat belts properly. Wear-
ous injury to the child.
ing a seat belt properly during an
accident reduces the chances of
death or serious injury or being
thrown out of the vehicle. For
instructions and precautions con-
cerning the seat belt system, see
”Seat belts” on page 46.

60
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

 On vehicles with side airbags and

curtain shield airbags, do not allow
the child to lean against the front
door or around the front door even
if the child is seated in the child
restraint system. It is dangerous if
the side airbags and curtain shield
airbags inflate, because the impact
could cause death or serious injury
to the child.
 For instructions concerning the
Move seat fully back installation of a child restraint sys-
tem, see ”Child restraint” on page
74.
 A forward−facing child restraint sys-  Do not sit on the edge of the seat
tem should be allowed to be put on or lean over the dashboard when
the front passenger seat only when the vehicle is in use. The front pas-
it is unavoidable. Always move the senger airbag inflates with consid-
seat as far back as possible, be- erable speed and force and you
cause the force of the deploying may be killed or seriously injured.
front passenger airbag could cause Sit up straight and well back in the
death or serious injury to the child. seat, and always use your seat belt
properly.

61
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

 Do not modify or remove any wir-

ing. Do not modify, remove, strike
or open any components such as
the steering wheel pad, steering
wheel, column cover, front passen-
ger airbag cover, front passenger
airbag or airbag sensor assembly.
Doing so may cause sudden SRS
airbag inflation or disable the sys-
tem, which could result in death or
serious injury.
Failure to follow these instructions
can result in death or serious injury.
Consult your Toyota dealer before
 Do not allow a child to stand up or  Do not put objects or your pets on performing any repairs and modifica-
kneel on the front passenger seat. or in front of the dashboard or tions.
The front passenger airbag inflates steering wheel pad that houses the
with considerable speed and force front airbag system. They might re-
and the child may be killed or seri- strict inflation or cause death or
ously injured. serious injury as they are projected
 Do not hold a child on your lap or rearward by the force of deploying
in your arms. Use a child restraint airbags. Likewise, the driver and
system in the rear seat. For instruc- front passenger should not hold ob-
tions concerning the installation of jects in their arms or on their
a child restraint system, see ”Child knees.
restraint” on page 74.

62
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following
changes without first consulting your
Toyota dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the
SRS front airbag system in some
cases.
z Installation of electronic devices
such as a mobile two−way radio,
cassette tape player or compact
disc player
z Modification of the suspension sys-
tem This SRS front airbag system has a In the following cases, contact your Toyota
z Modification of the front end struc- service reminder indicator to inform the dealer as soon as possible:
ture driver of operating problems. If either of  The SRS airbags have been inflated.
the following conditions occurs, this
z Attachment of a grille guard (bull  The front of the vehicle (shaded in the
indicates a malfunction of the airbag
bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow, illustration) was involved in an accident
system. Contact your Toyota dealer as
winches or any other equipment to that was not severe enough to cause
soon as possible to service the vehicle.
the front end the SRS airbags to inflate.
z Repairs made on or near the front
 When the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position, the light does not  The pad section of the steering wheel
fenders, front end structure, con- or dashboard (shaded in the illustra-
come on, stays on or flashes.
sole, steering column, steering tion) is scratched, cracked, or other-
wheel or dashboard near the front  The light comes on or flashes while wise damaged.
passenger airbag driving.
NOTICE
Do not disconnect the battery cables
before contacting your Toyota dealer.

63
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

SRS side and curtain shield

airbags with roll sensing func-
tion
In response to a severe side impact, the
SRS side and curtain shield airbags on CAUTION
impacted side inflate. The SRS side airbag
works together with the seat belts to help The SRS side and curtain shield air-
to reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s or bags inflate with considerable force.
front passenger’s chest and the SRS cur- To avoid potential death or serious
tain shield airbag works together with seat injury when they inflate, the driver,
belts to help to reduce injuries mainly to front passenger and second seat pas-
the driver’s, front passenger’s head and sengers must:
can help the driver, front passenger and  Wear their seat belts properly.
second seat passengers to retain inside
 Remain properly seated with their
the vehicle.
back upright and against the seat at
Roll sensing function: all times.
In response to a vehicle rollover, the cur-
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-  Improper sitting and wearing of the
tain shield airbags on both sides inflate.
tem) side and curtain shield airbags are seat belts may not retain you inside
The curtain shield airbags work together
designed to provide further protection the vehicle.
with the seat belts to help to reduce inju-
for the driver, front and second seat ries mainly to the driver’s head, front pas-
passengers in addition to the primary senger’s head and second seat passen-
safety protection provided by the seat ger’s heads and can help the driver, front
belts. passenger and second seat passengers to
retain inside the vehicle.
The SRS side and curtain shield airbags
on the passenger side are activated even
with no passenger in the front seat.
Be sure to wear your seat belt properly.

64
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

When you push the roll sensing of curtain

shield airbags off switch for a few sec- CAUTION
onds with the ignition switch on, the roll
sensing of curtain shield airbags off indi-  Make sure the roll sensing of cur-
cator light comes on and the roll sensing tain shield airbags off indicator
function is turned off. When you push the light is not on.
switch again, the indicator light goes off  When the roll sensing of curtain
and the roll sensing function is turned on. shield airbags off switch is turned
In a severe side impact, the curtain shield on (and the roll sensing of curtain
airbag on impacted side will inflate even shield airbags off indicator light is
if the roll sensing function is turned off. on), the curtain shield airbags will
not inflate in a vehicle rollover and
If the ignition switch is turned to ”ACC” or turning off the curtain shield air-
”LOCK” with the roll sensing function off
Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off
bags can reduce the occupant
and then the ignition switch is turned back
switch protection which your vehicle safety
to ”ON”, the roll sensing function will be systems can provide to you in cer-
back on automatically.
tain accidents and increase the like-
The roll sensing of curtain shield air- lihood of death or serious injuries.
bags off switch can turn off the curtain
shield airbags in a vehicle rollover. This
switch should only be used in a situa-
tion where the inflation is not desired
(such as extreme off road driving).

65
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Collision from the rear

Collision from the front

Vehicle rollover

This indicator comes on when the igni- The SRS side airbags may not inflate if The SRS side airbags are not designed
tion key is turned to the ”ON” position. the vehicle is subjected to a collision to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a
It goes off after about 6 seconds. This from the side at certain angles, or a front or rear collision, if it rolls over,
means the SRS side and curtain shield collision to the side of the vehicle body or if it is involved in a low−speed side
airbags are operating properly. other than the passenger compartment collision.
This warning light system monitors the as shown in the illustration.
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen- The SRS side airbags are designed to
sors, side and curtain shield airbag sensor inflate when the passenger compartment
assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor area suffers a severe impact from the
assemblies, driver’s seat position sensor, side.
driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front seat For the safety of all occupants, always
belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, wear your seat belts properly.
warning light, interconnecting wiring and
power sources. (For details, see ”Service
reminder indicators and warning buzzers”
on page 118.)

66
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Collision from
the front Collision from
the rear

The angle of Skidding vehicle

vehicle tip−up hitting a curb
is marginal stone Pitch end over end

The curtain shield airbags may inflate The curtain shield airbags are not de-
The curtain shield airbags may not in-
if the angle of vehicle tip−up is margin- signed to inflate if the vehicle is in-
flate if the vehicle is subjected to a
al or if the skidding vehicle’s tires hit volved in a front or rear collision, if it
collision from the side at certain
a curb stone laterally as shown in the pitches end over end or if it is involved
angles, or a collision to the side of the
illustration. in a low−speed side collision.
vehicle body other than the passenger
compartment as shown in the illustra-
tion.
The curtain shield airbags are designed to
inflate when the passenger compartment
area suffers a severe impact from the
side or vehicle rollover.
For the safety of all occupants, always
wear your seat belts properly.

67
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

The SRS side and curtain shield airbag

system is controlled by the airbag sensor
assembly. The airbag sensor assembly
consists of a safing sensor and airbag
sensor.
Hitting a curb, edge of Falling into or jump- In a severe side impact, the side and
pavement or hard sur- ing over a deep hole curtain shield airbag sensor and/or the
face curtain shield airbag sensor triggers the
side and curtain shield airbag inflators.
Then a chemical reaction in the inflators
quickly fills the airbags with non−toxic gas
to help restrain the lateral motion of front
Landing hard or vehicle falling
and second seat occupants.
The SRS side and curtain shield airbags In a vehicle rollover, the airbag sensor
The main components of the SRS side
may deploy if a severe impact occurs assembly triggers the curtain shield airbag
and curtain shield airbag system and their
to the underside of your vehicle. Some inflator. At this time, a chemical reaction
locations are shown in the illustration
examples are shown in the illustration. in the inflators quickly fills the airbags
above.
with non−toxic gas to help restrain the
1. SRS warning light lateral motion of the occupants.
2. Curtain shield airbag modules When the airbags inflate, they produce a
(airbag and inflator) fairly loud noise and release some smoke
3. Side airbag modules and residue along with non−toxic gas. This
(airbag and inflator) does not indicate a fire. This gas is nor-
mally harmless; however, for those who
4. Curtain shield airbag sensor assembly
have delicate skin, it may cause a minor
5. Side and curtain shield airbag sensor skin irritation. Be sure to wash off any
assembly residue as soon as possible to prevent
6. Airbag sensor assembly any potential skin irritation.

68
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Deployment of the airbags happens in a

fraction of a second, so the airbags must CAUTION  Improperly seated and/or restrained
inflate with considerable force. While the infants and children can be killed
system is designed to reduce serious inju-  The SRS side and curtain shield air- or seriously injured by the deploy-
ries, it may also cause minor burns or bag system is designed only as a ing airbags. An infant or child who
abrasions and swelling. supplement to the primary protec- is too small to use a seat belt
tion of the driver’s, front and sec- should be properly secured using a
Front seats as well as parts of the front child restraint system. Toyota
ond seat passengers’ seat belt sys-
and rear pillar, front, center and rear gar-
tems. To ensure maximum protec- strongly recommends that all in-
nish and roof interior may be hot for sev-
tion in an accident, the driver and fants and children be placed in the
eral minutes, but the airbags themselves rear seat of the vehicle and proper-
all passengers in the vehicle must
will not be hot. The airbags are designed
wear their seat belts properly. Wear- ly restrained. The rear seats are the
to inflate only once.
ing a seat belt properly during an safest for infants and children. For
accident reduces the chances of instructions concerning the installa-
death or serious injury or being tion of a child restraint system, see
thrown out of the vehicle. For in- ”Child restraint” on page 74.
structions and precautions concern-
ing the seat belt system, see ”Seat
belts” on page 46.

69
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

 Do not lean against the door and  Make sure the roll sensing of cur-  Do not get your head and do not
do not allow a child to do so when tain shield airbags off indicator is allow a child’s head to get closer
the vehicle is in use. The side and not on. The curtain shield airbags than necessary to the area where
curtain shield airbags inflate with will not inflate in a vehicle rollover the side and curtain shield airbags
considerable speed and force and if this indicator light is on and you inflate. These airbags inflate with
you or a child may be killed or may be killed or seriously injured. considerable speed and force and
seriously injured. may kill or seriously injure you or
 Sit up straight and well back in the a child.
seat, distributing your weight evenly  Do not allow a child to kneel on the
in the seat. Do not apply excessive passenger seat facing the passen-
weight to the outer side of the front ger’s side door. Since the side and
seats on vehicles with side airbags. curtain shield airbags inflate with
 Improper sitting and wearing of the considerable speed and force, the
seat belts may not retain you inside child may be killed or seriously in-
the vehicle. jured.

70
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

 Do not put your head or hands out  Do not attach a cup holder or any  Do not attach a microphone or any
of windows and do not allow chil- other device or object on or around other device or object near the area
dren to do so. Since the curtain the door. When the side airbags in- where the curtain shield airbags ac-
shield airbags inflate with consider- flate, the cup holder or any other tivate such as on the windshield
able speed and force, you or the device or object will be thrown with glass, side door glass, front, center
child may be killed or seriously in- great force, or the side airbags may and roof side garnish, roof interior
jured. not activate correctly, which could or assist grips. When the curtain
result in death or serious injury. shield airbags inflate, the micro-
Likewise, the driver and front pas- phone or other device or object will
senger should not hold objects in be hurled with great force or the
their arms or on their knees. curtain shield airbags may not acti-
vate correctly, which could result in
death or serious injury.

71
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

 Do not hook a hanger, heavy or  Do not disassemble or repair the  Do not modify or change the sus-
sharp pointed objects on the coat front and rear pillars and roof side pension system. Such changes may
hook. If the curtain shield airbags rail containing the curtain shield cause the curtain shield airbags to
inflate, those items will be hurled airbags. Such changes may disable inflate accidentally, which could re-
away with great force or the curtain the system or cause the curtain sult in death or serious injury.
shield airbags may not activate cor- shield airbags to inflate accidental- Failure to follow these instructions
rectly which could result in death ly, which could result in death or can result in death or serious injury.
or serious injury. When you hang serious injury. Consult your Toyota dealer before
clothes, hang them on the coat  Do not use tires or wheels other performing any repairs and modifica-
hook directly. than the manufacturer’s recom- tions.
 Do not use seat accessories which mended size. Such a use may cause
cover the area where the side air- the curtain shield airbags to inflate
bags inflate. Such accessories may accidentally, which could result in
prevent the side airbags from acti- death or serious injury. For details,
vating correctly, which could cause see ”Checking and replacing tires”
death or serious injury. on page 275.
 Do not modify or replace the seats  Do not place luggage heavier than
or upholstery of front seats with specified on the roof luggage carri-
side airbags. Such changes may er. Such luggage may cause the
disable the system or cause the curtain shield airbags to inflate ac-
side airbags to inflate accidentally, cidentally, which could result in
which could result in death or seri- death or serious injury. For details,
ous injury. see ”Roof luggage carrier” on page
188.

72
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following
changes without first consulting your
Toyota dealer. Such changes can in-
terfere with proper operation of the
SRS airbag system in some cases.
z Installation of electronic devices
such as a mobile two−way radio,
cassette tape player or compact
disc player.
z Modification of the side structure of
the passenger compartment.
z Repairs made on or near the con- This SRS side and curtain shield airbag
sole or front seats. system has a service reminder indicator to
inform the driver of operating problems. If
either of the following conditions occurs,
this indicates a malfunction of the airbag
system. Contact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible to service the vehicle.
 When the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position, the light does not
come on, stays on or flashes.
 The light comes on or flashes while
driving.

73
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Child restraint—
—Child restraint precautions
In the following cases, contact your Toyota Toyota strongly urges the use of child
dealer as soon as possible: restraint systems for children small  Toyota strongly urges use of a
proper child restraint system which
 The SRS side and curtain shield air- enough to use them.
conforms to the size of the child,
bags have been inflated. The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A. installed on the rear seat. Accord-
 The portion of the doors (shaded in the now require the use of a child restraint
ing to accident statistics, the child
illustration) was involved in an accident system.
is safer when properly restrained in
that was not severe enough to cause Your vehicle conforms to SAEJ1819. the rear seat than in the front seat.
the SRS side and curtain shield air- If a child is too large for a child restraint  Never put a rear−facing child re-
bags to inflate. system, the child should sit in the rear straint system on the front seat. In
 The surface of the seats with the side seat and must be restrained using the the event of an accident, the force
airbag (shaded in the illustration) is vehicle’s seat belt. See ”Seat belts” on of the rapid inflation of the airbag
scratched, cracked, or otherwise dam- page 46 for details. can cause death or serious injury if
aged. a rear−facing child restraint system
 The portion of the front, center and CAUTION is put on the front seat.
rear garnish, and roof interior contain-  A forward−facing child restraint sys-
ing the curtain shield airbags inside  For effective protection in automo- tem should be allowed to be put on
(shaded in the illustration) is scratched, bile accidents and sudden stops, a the front seat only when it is un-
cracked, or otherwise damaged. child must be properly restrained, avoidable. Always move the seat as
using a seat belt or child restraint far back as possible, because the
system depending on the age and force of the deploying airbag could
size of the child. Holding a child in cause death or serious injury to the
your arms is not a substitute for a child.
child restraint system. In an acci-
dent, the child can be crushed
against the windshield, or between
you and the vehicle’s interior.

74
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Child restraint system

A child restraint system for a small
 On vehicle with side airbags and child or baby must itself be properly CAUTION
curtain shield airbags, do not allow restrained on the seat with either the
the child to lean against the front lap belt or the lap portion of the lap/  Never put a rear−facing child re-
door or around the front door even shoulder belt. You must carefully con- straint system on the front seat. In
if the child is seated in the child sult the manufacturer’s instructions the event of an accident, the force
restraint system. It is dangerous if which accompany the child restraint of the rapid inflation of the airbag
the side airbag and curtain shield system. can cause death or serious injury if
airbag inflate, and the impact could a rear−facing child restraint system
To provide proper restraint, use a child
cause death or serious injury to the is put on the front seat.
child. restraint system following the manufactur-
er’s instructions about the appropriate age  A forward−facing child restraint sys-
 Make sure you have complied with and size of the child for the child restraint tem should be allowed to be put on
all installation instructions provided system. the front seat only when it is un-
by the child restraint manufacturer avoidable. Always move the seat as
Install the child restraint system correctly
and that the system is properly se- far back as possible, because the
cured. following the instructions provided by its force of the deploying airbag could
manufacturer. General directions are also
cause death or serious injury to the
provided under the following illustrations.
child.
The child restraint system should be
installed on the rear seat. According to
accident statistics, the child is safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat than
in the front seat.

75
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Types of child restraint

For instructions about how to use the an- system
chor bracket, see ”Using a top strap” on
Child restraint systems are classified into
 On vehicle with side airbags and page 91.
the following 3 types depending on the
curtain shield airbags, do not allow child’s age and size.
the child to lean against the front
door or around the front door even (A) Infant seat
(B) Convertible seat
if the child is seated in the child
(C) Booster seat
restraint system. It is dangerous if
the side airbag and curtain shield Install the child restraint system following
airbag inflate, and the impact could the instructions provided by its manufac-
cause death or serious injury to the turer.
child. Child restraint lower anchorages approved
 After installing the child restraint for your vehicle may also be used. See
system, make sure it is secured in ”Installation with child restraint lower an-
place following the manufacturer’s chorages” on page 93.
instructions. If it is not restrained
securely, it may cause death or se-
rious injury to the child in the
event of a sudden stop or accident.

When not using the child restraint system,

keep it secured with the seat belt or place
it somewhere other than the passenger
compartment. This will prevent it from in-
juring passengers in the event of a sud-
den stop or accident.
Your vehicle has anchor brackets for se-
curing the top strap of a child restraint
system.

76
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Installation with 2−point

type seat belt

(A) Infant seat (C) Booster seat

(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION
An infant seat is used in rear−facing
position only.

(B) Convertible seat

77
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

CAUTION

 After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt is not twisted.
 Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent you
from properly latching the tab and
buckle.
 If the seat belt does not function
normally, it cannot protect your
child from injury. Contact your
1. Run the center lap belt through or Toyota dealer immediately. Do not
CAUTION around the infant seat following the use the child restraint seat until the
instructions provided by its manufactur- seat belt is fixed.
Do not put a child restraint system er and insert the tab into the buckle
on the third seat if it interferes with taking care not to twist the lap belt.
the lock mechanism of the second
seats. This can cause death or seri-
ous injury to the child and passen-
gers sitting in the second seats in
case of sudden braking or a collision.

78
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

2. While pressing the infant seat firmly 3. To remove the infant seat, press the
against the seat cushion and seatback, CAUTION buckle−release button.
tighten the lap belt by pulling its free
end to hold the infant seat securely. Push and pull the child restraint sys-
tem in different directions to be sure
it is secure. Follow all the installation
instruction provided by its manufac-
turer.

79
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION 1. Run the center lap belt through or
CAUTION around the convertible seat following
A convertible seat is used in forward−
facing or rear−facing position depend- the instructions provided by its
Do not put a child restraint system manufacturer and insert the tab into
ing on the child’s age and size. When
on the third seat if it interferes with the buckle taking care not to twist the
installing, follow the manufacturer’s the lock mechanism of the second
instruction about the applicable child’s lap belt.
seats. This can cause death or seri-
age and size as well as directions for
ous injury to the child and passen-
installing the child restraint system. gers sitting second seats in case of
sudden braking or a collision.

80
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

CAUTION

 After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt is not twisted.
 Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent you
from properly latching the tab and
buckle.
 If the seat belt does not function
normally, it cannot protect your
child from injury. Contact your
Toyota dealer immediately. Do not 2. While pressing the convertible seat
firmly against the seat cushion and CAUTION
use the child restraint seat until the
seat belt is fixed. seatback, tighten the lap belt by pulling
its free end to hold the convertible seat Push and pull the child restraint sys-
securely. tem in different directions to be sure
it is secure. Follow all the installation
instructions provided by its manufac-
turer.

81
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Installation with 3−point

type seat belt

3. To remove the convertible seat, press (A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION

the buckle−release button. CAUTION
An infant seat is used in rear−facing
position only.  Never put a rear−facing child re-
straint system on the front passen-
ger seat because the force of the
rapid inflation of the passenger air-
bag can cause death or serious in-
jury to the child.

82
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

CAUTION

 After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.
 Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent you
from properly latching the tab and
buckle.
 If the seat belt does not function
normally, it cannot protect your
child from injury. Contact your
1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through Toyota dealer immediately. Do not
 Do not put a child restraint system or around the infant seat following the
on the second (or third) seat if it use the child restraint seat until the
instructions provided by its manufactur- seat belt is fixed.
interferes with the lock mechanism er and insert the tab into the buckle
of the front (or second) seats. This taking care not to twist the belt. Keep
may cause death or serious injury the lap portion of the belt tight.
to the child and front passenger in
case of sudden braking or a colli-
sion.
 If the driver’s seat position does
not allow sufficient space for safe
installation, install the child re-
straint system on the second right
seat.

83
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it 3. While pressing the infant seat firmly
in the lock mode. When the belt is against the seat cushion and seatback, CAUTION
then retracted even slightly, it cannot let the shoulder belt retract as far as
be extended. it will go to hold the infant seat secure- Push and pull the child restraint sys-
ly. tem in different directions to be sure
To hold the infant seat securely, make it is secure. Follow all the installation
sure the belt is in the lock mode before instructions provided by its manufac-
letting the belt retract.
turer.

84
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

4. To remove the infant seat, press the (B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION
buckle−release button and allow the CAUTION
A convertible seat is used in forward−
belt to retract completely. The belt will facing or rear−facing position depend-
move freely again and be ready to  Never put a rear−facing child re-
ing on the child’s age and size. When
work for an adult or older child passen- straint system on the front passen-
installing, follow the manufacturer’s in- ger seat because the force of the
ger. structions about the applicable child’s rapid inflation of the passenger air-
age and size as well as directions for
bag can cause death or serious in-
installing the child restraint system. jury to the child.

85
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

 On vehicle with side airbags and

curtain shield airbags, do not allow
the child to lean against the front
door or around the front door even
if the child is seated in the child
restraint system. It is dangerous if
the side airbag and curtain shield
airbag inflate, and the impact could
cause death or serious injury to the
child.

Move seat fully back

 A forward−facing child restraint sys-  Do not put a child restraint system

tem should be allowed to be put on on the second (or third) seat if it
the front passenger seat only when interferes with the lock mechanism
it is unavoidable. Always move the of the front (or second) seats. This
seat as far back as possible, be- may cause death or serious injury
cause the force of the deploying to the child and passenger sitting
passenger airbag could cause death in front (or second) seats in case
or serious injury to the child. of sudden braking or a collision.
 If the driver’s seat position does
not allow sufficient space for safe
installation, install the child re-
straint system on the second right
seat.

86
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

CAUTION

 After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.
 Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent you
from properly latching the tab and
buckle.
 If the seat belt does not function
normally, it cannot protect your
child from injury. Contact your
1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through Toyota dealer immediately. Do not 2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it
or around the convertible seat following use the child restraint seat until the in the lock mode. When the belt is
the instructions provided by its seat belt is fixed. then retracted even slightly, it cannot
manufacturer and insert the tab into be extended.
the buckle taking care not to twist the To hold the convertible seat securely,
belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt make sure the belt is in the lock mode
tight. before letting the belt retract.

87
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

3. While pressing the convertible seat 4. To remove the convertible seat, press
firmly against the seat cushion and CAUTION the buckle−release button and allow the
seatback, let the shoulder belt retract belt to retract completely. The belt will
as far as it will go to hold the convert- Push and pull the child restraint sys- move freely again and be ready to
ible seat securely. tem in different directions to be sure work for an adult or older child passen-
it is secure. Follow all the installation ger.
instructions provided by its manufac-
turer.

88
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

 On vehicle with side airbags and

curtain shield airbags, do not allow
the child to lean against the front
door or around the front door even
if the child is seated in the child
restraint system. It is dangerous if
the side airbag and curtain shield
airbag inflate, and the impact could
cause death or serious injury to the
child.

Move seat fully back

(C) BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION

CAUTION
A booster seat is used in forward−fac-
ing position only.  A forward−facing child restraint sys-
tem should be allowed to be put on
the front seat only when it is un-
avoidable. Always move the seat as
far back as possible, because the
force of the deploying passenger
airbag could cause death or serious
injury to the child.

89
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

CAUTION  If the seat belt does not function

normally, it cannot protect your
 Always make sure the shoulder belt child from injury. Contact your
is positioned across the center of Toyota dealer immediately. Do not
child’s shoulder. The belt should be use the child restraint seat until the
kept away from child’s neck, but seat belt is fixed.
not falling off child’s shoulder. Fail-
ure to do so could reduce the
amount of protection in an accident
and cause serious injuries in a col-
lision.
 Both high−positioned lap belts and
loose−fitting belts could cause seri-
1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Run ous injuries due to sliding under
the lap and shoulder belt through or the lap belt during a collision or
around the booster seat and child fol- other unintended result. Keep the
lowing the instructions provided by its lap belt positioned as low on
manufacturer and insert the tab into child’s hips as possible.
the buckle taking care not to twist the  For child’s safety, do not place the
belt. shoulder belt under child’s arm.
Make sure the shoulder belt is correctly  After inserting the tab, make sure
across the child’s shoulder and that the the tab and buckle are locked and
lap belt is positioned as low as possible that the lap and shoulder portions
on child’s hips. See ”Seat belts” on page of the belt are not twisted.
46 for details.
 Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent your
child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.

90
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Using a top strap

Symbol

13C001
Anchor
brackets

2. To remove the child restraint system, Follow the procedure below for a child Use the anchor bracket located behind the
press the buckle−release button and al- restraint system that requires the use second seat on the floor to attach the top
low the belt to retract. of a top strap. strap.
Anchor brackets are installed for each
second seating position.
This symbol indicates the location of user
ready anchor brackets.

91
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

13C003 13C004 13C005

TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET: 2. Fix the child restraint system with 4. Replace the head restraint.
1. Remove the head restraint. the seat belt.
3. Take off the cover, latch the hook
onto the anchor bracket and tighten
the top strap.
For instructions to install the child re-
straint system, see “Child restraint—” on
page 74.

CAUTION

 Make sure the top strap is securely

latched, and check that the child re-
straint system is secure by pushing
and pulling it in different directions.
 Follow all installation instructions
provided by its manufacturer.

92
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Installation with child

restraint lower anchorages

13C532b

13C529 13C009

Type A
The lower anchorages for the child re- CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM INSTALLA-
straint system interfaced with the TION
FMVSS225 specification are installed in 1. Take off the cover between the seat
the second seat. cushion and seatback a little and
The anchorages are installed in the clear- confirm the position of the lower an-
ance between the seat cushion and seat- chorages below the tag on the seat
back of left and center second seats. cushion.
13C008
Child restraint system interfaced with the
FMVSS225 specification can be fixed with
these anchorages. In this case, it is not
necessary to fix the child restraint system
with a seat belt on the vehicle.

Type B

93
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Power tilt and telescopic steer-

ing wheel
Type A—
CAUTION
2. Latch the hooks of lower straps onto
the anchorages and tighten the lower
 When using the lower anchorages
straps.
for the child restraint system, be
Type B— sure that there are no irregular ob-
2. Latch the buckles onto the anchor- jects around the anchorages or that
ages the seat belt is not caught.
If your child restraint system has a top  Push and pull the child restraint
strap, it should be anchored. (For the system in different directions to be
installation of the top strap, see “—Using sure it is secure. Follow all the
a top strap” on page 91.) installation instructions provided by
its manufacturer.
For the installation details, refer to the
instruction manual equipped with each  Do not put a child restraint system
on the rear seat if it interferes with ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING WHEEL
product. TILT
the lock mechanism of the front
seats. This can cause death or seri- To adjust the tilt of the steering wheel,
ous injury to the child and front push the control switch upward or
passenger in case of sudden brak- downward to set it to the desired posi-
ing or a collision. tion.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the steering wheel

while the vehicle is moving. Doing so
may cause the driver to mishandle
the vehicle and an accident may oc-
cur resulting in death or serious inju-
ries.

94
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Outside rear view mirrors—

CAUTION

Do not adjust the steering column

while the vehicle is moving. Doing so
may cause the driver to mishandle
the vehicle and an accident may oc-
cur resulting in death or serious inju-
ries.

ADJUSTMENT OF TELESCOPIC STEER- Adjust the mirror so that you can just
ING COLUMN see the side of your vehicle in the mir-
To adjust the steering column length, ror.
push the control switch forward or Be careful when judging the size or dis-
backward to set the steering wheel to tance of any object seen in the outside
the desired position. rear view mirror on the passenger’s side
When the ignition key is removed, the because it is a convex mirror. Any object
steering column moves forward away from seen in a convex mirror will look smaller
the driver and also tilts up for easy exit and farther away than when seen in a flat
and entry. mirror.

When the key is inserted into the ignition When you push the outside rear view mir-
switch, the steering column returns to the ror heater switch, the heater panels in the
previously set position. outside rear view mirrors will quickly clear
the mirror surface. (See “Outside rear
This feature can be set inoperative. Ask view mirror heaters” on page 112.)
your Toyota dealer.

95
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Power rear view mirror

control

CAUTION NOTICE
If ice should jam the mirror, do not
 Do not adjust the mirror while the operate the control or scrape the mir-
vehicle is moving. Doing so may
ror face. Use a spray de−icer to free
cause the driver to mishandle the
the mirror.
vehicle and an accident may occur
resulting in death or serious inju-
ries.
 Since the mirror surfaces can get
hot, do not touch them when the
mirror heater switch is on.

To adjust a mirror, use the switches.

1. Master switch—To select the mirror to
be adjusted
Place the switch at ”L” (left) or ”R”
(right).
2. Control switch—To move the mirror
Push the switch in the desired direc-
tion.
Mirrors can be adjusted when the key is
in the ”ACC” or ”ON” position.

96
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Anti−glare inside rear view

—Folding rear view mirrors mirror—
When the ignition key is inserted and
turned on, the inside rear view mirror al-
ways turns on in the “AUTO” mode.
When the outside air temperature is low,
it may take a little longer for the mirror
to darken in response to the detection of
headlights.
13C010
CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while the

vehicle is moving. Doing so may
cause the driver to mishandle the ve-
hicle and an accident may occur re-
The rear view mirrors can be folded Adjust the mirror so that you can just
sulting in death or serious injuries.
backward for parking in compact areas. see the rear of your vehicle in the mir-
To fold the rear view mirror, push back- ror.
ward. Pushing the switch changes the mode
between “AUTO” and “DAY”.
CAUTION The indicator comes on when the “AUTO”
mode is selected.
Do not drive with the mirrors folded
“DAY” mode: The mirror surface is nor-
backward. Both the driver and pas-
mal.
senger side rear view mirrors must
be extended and properly adjusted “AUTO” mode: If the mirror detects
before driving. light from the headlights of the vehicle
behind you, the mirror surface darkens
slightly to reduce the reflected light.

97
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Compass
Pushing the “AUTO” button for longer
NOTICE
3 seconds turns on or off the compass
display. Do not put magnets or a metal object
The compass may not show the correct near the inside rear view mirror. Do-
direction in the following conditions: ing this may cause malfunction of the
compass sensor.
 The vehicle is stopped immediately af-
13C013 ter turning. The compass does not ad-
just while the vehicle is stopped. CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (deviation
calibration)
 The ignition switch is turned off imme-
diately after turning. The direction display on the compass
 The vehicle is on an inclined surface. deviates from the true direction deter-
mined by the earth’s magnetic field, The
 The vehicle is in a place where the amount of deviation varies according to
earth’s magnetic field is subject to in- the geographic position of the vehicle.
The compass indicates the direction in
terference by artificial magnetic fields
which the vehicle is heading. The illustra- To adjust for this deviation, stop the ve-
(underground parking, under a steel
tion shown above indicates the vehicle is tower, between buildings, roof parking, hicle and push the button for longer than
heading north. about 6 seconds until the number (1−15)
near a crossing, near a large vehicle,
etc.). appears on the display. Then push the
Displays Directions button again, referring to the following
 The vehicle is magnetized. (There is a map to select the number of the zone
N North
magnet or a metal object on or near where the vehicle is.
NE Northeast the inside rear view mirror.)
E East
 The battery has been disconnected.
SE Southeast
 Any door is open.
S South
The compass works to calibrate the direc-
SW Southwest
tion automatically while the vehicle is in
W West motion, if deviation is small.
NW Northwest
For obtaining additional precision or for
complete calibrating, see “Calibrating the
compass” below.
98
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

If the direction is displayed several sec-

onds after adjustment, the calibration is
finished.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while the

vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust
the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.

13C015

Zone number  Hawaii is included in zone 5.

99
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

 Do not perform circling calibration of

the compass in a place where the
earth’s magnetic field is subject to in-
terference by artificial magnetic fields
(underground parking, under a steel
tower, between buildings, roof parking,
near a crossing, near a large vehicle,
13C011 13C012 etc.).
 During calibration, do not operate elec-
tric systems (moon roof, power win-
dows, etc.) as they may interfere with
the calibration.

CAUTION
CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (circling Drive the vehicle slowly (at 8km/h (5mph)
calibration) or lower) in a circle until the direction is
 When doing the circling calibration,
“C” appears on the display in case the displayed. If there is not enough space to
be sure to secure a wide space,
circling calibration is required due to a drive in a circle, drive around the block
and watch out for people and ve-
drastic change in the magnetic field. To until the direction is displayed.
hicles in the neighborhood. Do not
rectify this, follow the calibration proce- After driving in 1 to 3 circles in the above violate any local traffic rules while
dure below. method, calibration is complete with the performing circling calibration.
direction shown on the display.
 Do not adjust the display while the
If calibration cannot be performed because vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust
of the magnetized vehicle, etc., take your the display only when the vehicle is
vehicle to Toyota dealer. stopped.

100
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Sun visors— —Vanity mirror

To block out glare, move the sun visor. To block the glare from the front when the To use the vanity mirror, swing down
To block out glare from the front—Swing main sun visor is swung down, swing the main sun visor and open the cover.
down the main sun visor. down the second sun visor. The vanity light comes on when you open
To block out glare from the side—Swing the cover.
CAUTION
down the main sun visor, remove it from
the hook and swing it to the lateral side. Slide the main sun visor only when
You can adjust its position as shown. it is swung down to the lateral side.
It can cover the anti−glare inside rear
view mirror and obstruct the rear
view.

101
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

102
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

SECTION 1− 4
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Lights, Wipers and Defogger
Headlight and turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Emergency flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Instrument panel light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Front fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Ignition switch light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Windshield wipers and washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Rear window wiper and washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Rear window defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Outside rear view mirror heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

103
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Headlight and turn signals

Manually twist the knob to the position 2
to turn on the headlights if they are need-
ed immediately when entering a dark tun-
nel, parking structure, etc.
NOTE: *The operating condition or sensi-
tivity can be changed. Ask your Toyota
dealer for details.

HEADLIGHTS The automatic light control sensor is on

To turn on the following lights: Twist the top of the passenger’s side instrument
the headlight/turn signal lever knob. panel.
Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate, Do not place anything on the instrument
side marker and instrument panel lights panel, and/or do not affix anything on the
windshield to block this sensor.
However, if the surroundings are bright
and if the instrument panel light control
dial is not turned fully on, the instrument
panel lights do not come on.
Position 2—Headlights and all of the
above
Position 3 (”AUTO”)—Headlights and/or all
of the lights in position 1
They automatically turn on or off depend-
ing on the darkness of the surroundings.*

104
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

The headlights turn on at reduced intensi-

ty when the parking brake is released with
When the headlights come on, the lights To turn on the other exterior lights and
the engine started, even with the light
automatically turn off about 30 seconds instrument panel lights, twist the knob to
after any of the doors is opened and switch in the ”OFF” position. They will not
the position 1.
closed with the ignition key turned to the go off until the ignition switch is turned
”ACC” or ”LOCK” position.* To turn them off. Twist the knob to the position 2 to turn
on again, turn the ignition key to the ”ON” the headlights to full intensity for driving
position, or turn the headlight switch off at night.
and then twist the knob until the first or
second clickstop. If you are going to park
for over one week, make sure the head-
light switch is off.
When the headlight switch is on with all
the doors locked, pushing the ”LOCK” but-
ton on the wireless remote control key
turns off the headlights.
NOTE: *The time before turning off the
lights can be changed. Ask your Toyota
dealer for details.

NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being dis-
charged, do not leave the lights on
for a long period when the engine is
not running.

Daytime running light system

105
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Emergency flashers

High−Low beams—For high beams, turn TURN SIGNALS To turn on the emergency flashers,
the headlights on and push the lever away To signal a turn, push the headlight/ push the switch.
from you (position 1). Pull the lever to- turn signal lever up or down to position All the turn signal lights will flash. To turn
ward you (position 2) for low beams. 1. them off, push the switch once again.
The headlight high beam indicator light The key must be in the ”ON” position. Turn on the emergency flashers to warn
(blue light) on the instrument panel will other drivers if your vehicle must be
tell you that the high beams are on. The lever automatically returns after you stopped where it might be a traffic hazard.
make a turn, but you may have to return
Flashing the high beam headlights it by hand after you change lanes. Always pull your vehicle as far off the
(position 3)—Pull the lever all the way road as possible.
back. The high beam headlights turn off To signal a lane change, move the lever
The turn signal light switch will not work
when you release the lever. up or down to the pressure point (position
when the emergency flashers are operat-
2) and hold it.
You can flash the high beam headlights ing.
with the knob turned to ”OFF”. If the turn signal indicator lights (green
lights) on the instrument panel flash faster
than normal, a front or rear turn signal
bulb is burned out. See ”Replacing light
bulbs” on page 285.
106
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Instrument panel light control Front fog lights

NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being dis-
charged, do not leave the switch on
longer than necessary when the en-
gine is not running.

To adjust the brightness of the instru- To turn on the front fog lights, twist
ment panel lights, turn the dial. the band of the headlight/turn signal
lever. They will come on only when the
headlights are on low beam.

107
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Interior lights
To turn on the interior light, slide the ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM
switch. Center—
The interior light switch has the following With the switch in the ”DOOR” position,
positions: the light comes on when either side or
”ON”—Keeps the light on all the time. back door is opened. After all the doors
are closed, the light remains on for a
”OFF”—Turns the light off. certain time and then goes out.*
”DOOR”— However, in the following cases, the light
—Center: Turn the light on when any of goes out immediately:
side doors and back door are opened.  All the doors are closed when the igni-
—Rear: Turn the light on when any of the tion key is in ”ACC”, ”ON” or ”START”
rear side doors and back door are position.
Center
opened.  The ignition key is turned to ”ACC”,
”ON” or ”START” when the light is still
on.
 All the doors are locked when the light
is still on.
 One front side door will be closed with
the lock knob pushed forward while the
other doors are locked.
NOTE: *The interior lights can be set not
to come on or the duration of lighting can
be changed. Ask your Toyota dealer for
details.

Rear

108
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Personal lights
INTERIOR LIGHTS CUT OFF OPERATION To turn on the personal light, push the
When the ignition switch is ”OFF” and any switch on 1 side. To turn the lights off,
interior lights in the vehicle stay lighting push the switch on 2 side.
on, the lights will cut off automatically PERSONAL LIGHTS CUT OFF OPERA-
after 30 minutes. TION
You can cancel the cut off operation by: When the ignition switch is ”OFF” and any
personal lights in the vehicle stay lighting
 Turning the key to the ”ACC” position.
on, the lights will cut off automatically
 Opening or closing any of side doors after 30 minutes.
and back door.
You can cancel the cut off operation by:
All the lights are cut off when any of the
doors are locked or unlocked by key or
 Turning the key to the ”ACC” position.
wireless remote control key.  Opening or closing any of side doors
Front and back door.
All the lights are cut off when any of the
doors are locked or unlocked by key or
wireless remote control key.

Center

109
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Ignition switch light Windshield wipers and washer

To squirt washer fluid, pull the lever
toward you.
If the windshield wipers are off, they will
operate a couple of times after the washer
squirts.
For instructions on adding washer fluid,
see ”Adding washer fluid” on page 285.
In freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before using the washer.
This will help prevent the washer fluid
from freezing on your windshield, which
can block your vision.

For easy access to the ignition switch, To turn on the windshield wipers, move NOTICE
the ignition switch light comes on when the lever to the desired setting.
Do not operate the wipers if the wind-
any door is opened. The key must be in the ”ON” position. shield is dry. It may scratch the
The light remains on for a certain time There are 3 settings: glass.
after all the doors are closed.
1. ”INT” position: Intermittent operation
It goes off immediately when the ignition When waxing your vehicle, make sure that
switch is turned to the ”ACC” position or 2. ”LO” position: Low speed operation the washer nozzles do not become
when all the doors are locked. 3. ”HI” position: High speed operation blocked. If a nozzle becomes blocked,
Twist the interval adjuster upward to in- contact your Toyota dealer to have the
crease the wiping time interval between vehicle serviced.
sweeps, and downward to decrease it.
NOTICE
If a nozzle becomes blocked, do not
try to clear it with a pin or other
object. The nozzle will be damaged.

110
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Rear window wiper and washer Rear window defogger

NOTICE
Do not operate the rear wiper if the
rear window is dry. It may scratch the
glass.

To turn on the rear window wiper, twist To defog or defrost the rear window,
the lever knob upward. push the switch.
The key must be in the ”ON” position. The key must be in the ”ON” position.
There are 2 settings: The thin heater wires on the inside of the
1. ”INT” position: Intermittent operation rear window will quickly clear the surface.
An indicator light will illuminate to indicate
2. ”ON” position: Low speed operation the defogger is operating.
To squirt washer fluid on the rear window, Push the switch once again to turn the
twist the knob upward or downward as far defogger off.
as it will go (position 3 or 4). The knob
automatically returns from these positions The system will automatically shut off af-
after you release it. ter the defogger has operated about 15
minutes.
For instructions on adding washer fluid,
see ”Adding washer fluid” on page 285.

111
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Outside rear view mirror heaters

Make sure you turn the defogger off when
the surfaces are clear. Leaving the defog- CAUTION
ger on for a long time could cause the
battery to discharge, especially during Since the mirror surfaces can get hot,
stop−and−go driving. The defogger is not do not touch them when the mirror
designed for drying rain water or for melt- heater switch is on.
ing snow.
Make sure you turn the mirror heaters off
NOTICE when the surfaces are clear. Leaving the
z When cleaning the inside of the mirror heaters on for a long time could
cause the battery to discharge, especially
rear window, be careful not to
during stop−and−go driving. The mirror
scratch or damage the heater wires
or connectors. heaters are not designed for drying rain
water or for melting snow.
z To prevent the battery from being To defog or defrost the outside rear
discharged, turn the switch off If the outside rear view mirrors are heavi-
view mirrors, push the switch. ly coated with ice, use a spray de−icer
when the engine is not running.
The key must be in the ”ON” position. before operating the switch.
The heater panels in the outside rear view
mirrors will quickly clear the surfaces. An
NOTICE
indicator light will illuminate to indicate the To prevent the battery from being dis-
mirror heaters are operating. charged, turn the switch off when the
Push the switch once again to turn the engine is not running.
defoggers off.
The system will automatically shut off af-
ter the mirror heaters have operated about
15 minutes.

112
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

SECTION 1− 5
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Gauges, Meters and Service reminder indicators
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Odometer and two trip meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Trip information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

113
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Engine coolant temperature

Fuel gauge gauge
If the fuel tank is completely empty, the
malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Fill
the fuel tank immediately.
The indicator lamp goes off after driving
several times. If the indicator lamp does
not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible.
15C004
It is not a malfunction even if the needle
of the fuel gauge returns to “E” when the
ignition switch is turned to the “START”
position.

The gauge works when the ignition The gauge indicates the engine coolant
switch is on and indicates the approxi- temperature when the ignition switch is
mate quantity of fuel remaining in the on. The engine operating temperature
tank. will vary with changes in weather and
Nearly full—Needle at ”F” engine load.
Nearly empty—Needle at ”E” If the needle points to the red zone or
It is a good idea to keep the tank over higher, stop your vehicle and allow the
1/4 full. engine to cool.
If the fuel level approaches ”E” or the low Your vehicle may overheat during severe
fuel level warning light comes on, fill the operating conditions, such as:
fuel tank as soon as possible.  Driving up a long hill on a hot day.
On inclines or curves, due to the move-  Reducing speed or stopping after high
ment of fuel in the tank, the fuel gauge speed driving.
needle may fluctuate or the low fuel level  Idling for a long period with the air
warning light may come on earlier than conditioning on in stop−and−go traffic.
usual.
 Towing a trailer.
114
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Engine oil pressure gauge

It is not a malfunction even if the needle It is not a malfunction even if the needle
of the engine coolant temperature gauge of the engine oil pressure gauge returns
returns to “C” when the ignition switch is Normal to “L” when the ignition switch is turned
turned to the “START” position. driving to the “START” position.

NOTICE NOTICE
z Do not remove the thermostat in Do not drive the vehicle with the en-
the engine cooling system as this Idling gine oil pressure below the normal
may cause the engine to overheat. range until the cause is fixed—it may
The thermostat is designed to con- ruin the engine.
trol the flow of coolant to keep the
temperature of the engine within
the specified operating range.
z Do not continue driving with an The engine oil pressure gauge indicates
overheated engine. See ”If your ve- engine oil pressure when the ignition
hicle overheats” on page 230. switch is on. Check it while driving to
make sure the needle is in the proper
range.
If the engine oil pressure should stay be-
low the normal range, pull off the road to
a safe place and stop the engine immedi-
ately. Call a Toyota dealer or qualified
repair shop for assistance.
Engine oil pressure may not build up
when the engine oil level is too low. The
engine oil pressure gauge is not designed
to indicate oil level, and the engine oil
level must be checked using the level
dipstick.

115
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Voltmeter Tachometer
NOTICE
Do not let the indicator needle get
into the red zone. This may cause
severe engine damage.

The voltmeter tells whether the battery The tachometer indicates engine speed
is charged or discharged. Check it in thousands of rpm (revolutions per
while the engine is running—the needle minute). Use it while driving to prevent
should always indicate as shown above. engine over-revving.
If the needle reads below or above the Driving with the engine running too fast
normal range while the engine is running, causes excessive engine wear and poor
it indicates the charging system needs im- fuel economy. Remember, in most cases
mediate repair. the slower the engine speed, the greater
However, it is normal for the needle to the fuel economy.
drop below the normal range during en- It is not a malfunction even if the needle
gine starting. of the tachometer returns to “0” when the
It is not a malfunction even if the needle ignition switch is turned to the “START”
of the voltmeter returns to “9” when the position.
ignition switch is turned to the “START”
position.

116
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Odometer and two trip meters

To change the meter display, quickly
push and release the knob. The meter
display changes in the order from the
odometer to trip meter A to trip meter
B, then back to the odometer each
time you push.
To reset the trip meter A to zero, dis-
play the meter A reading, then push
and hold the knob until the meter is
set to zero. The same process can be
applied for resetting the trip meter B.

This meter displays the odometer and

two trip meters.
1. Odometer—Shows the total distance
the vehicle has been driven.
2. Two trip meters—Show two different
distances independently driven since
the last time each trip meter was set
to zero.
You can use one trip meter to calculate
the fuel economy and the other to
measure the distance on each trip. All
trip meter data is cancelled if the elec-
trical power source is disconnected.
3. Trip meter reset knob—Resets the two
trip meters to zero, and also change
the meter display.

117
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(a) If parking brake is off, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.
(Indicator and buzzer)

(b) Fasten driver’s seat belt.

(Indicator and buzzer)

(c) Fasten front passenger’s seat belt.

(d) Stop and check.

(e) Replace engine oil.

(f) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(g) Fill up tank.

(h) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer immediately.

118
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

Take vehicle to Toyota dealer. If brake system warning light is also on, stop immediately
(i)
and contact Toyota dealer.

(j) Close all side doors and back door.

(k) Shift four−wheel drive control out of “N”.

(l) Stop and check.

(m) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(n) Key reminder buzzer Remove key.

119
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

(a) Brake System Warning Light and Have your vehicle checked at your
Buzzer Toyota dealer in the following cases:  The brake system warning light re-
mains on together with the “ABS”
This light comes on in the following cases  The light does not come on even if the warning light.
when the ignition key is in the “ON” posi- parking brake is applied when the igni-
In this case, not only the anti−lock
tion. tion key is in the “ON” position.
brake system will fail but also the
 When the parking brake is applied...  The light does not come on even if the vehicle will become extremely unsta-
This light comes on for a few seconds ignition key is turned on with the park- ble during braking.
when the ignition key is in the “ON” posi- ing brake released.
tion even after the parking brake is re- A warning light turning on briefly during Any of the following conditions may oc-
leased. operation does not indicate a problem. cur, but do not indicate a malfunction:
 When the brake fluid level is low...  The light may stay on for about 60
CAUTION
seconds after the ignition key is turned
CAUTION to “ON” position. It is normal if it goes
If any of the following conditions oc-
out after a while.
It is dangerous to continue driving cur, immediately stop your vehicle at
normally when the brake fluid level is a safe place and contact your Toyota  Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly
dealer. may turn on the warning light and
low.
buzzer. It is normal if the light goes
 The light does not turn off even
out and the buzzer stops sounding af-
 When the hydraulic brake booster after the parking brake is released
ter a few seconds.
fails... while the engine is running.
 The warning buzzer comes on to-  You may hear a small sound in the
If the hydraulic booster causes an problem engine compartment after the engine is
resulting in poor braking performance, the gether with the warning light.
started or the brake pedal is depressed
warning light comes on and buzzer sounds In either case, this can indicate that repeatedly. This is a pump pulsating
continuously. the brakes may not work properly and sound of the brake system, and it is
your stopping distance will become not a malfunction.
longer. Depress the brake pedal firmly
and bring the vehicle to an immediate
stop.

120
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

(b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light (d) Discharge Warning Light When you drive for about 8000 km (5000
and Buzzer This light warns that the battery is being miles) after engine oil replacement, this
This light and buzzer remind you to discharged. light illuminates for about 3 seconds and
buckle up the driver’s seat belt. then flashes for about 12 seconds with
If it comes on while you are driving, there the ignition key is turned to ”ON” position.
Once the ignition key is turned to ”ON” or is a problem somewhere in the charging If you continue driving without engine oil
”START”, the reminder light flashes and system. replacement, and if the driving range ex-
the buzzer sounds if the driver’s seat belt The engine ignition will continue to oper- ceeds 12000 km (7500 miles), the light
is not fastened. Unless the driver fastens ate, however, until the battery is dis- will come on after the ignition key is
the belt, the light keeps on flashing and charged. Turn off the air conditioning, turned to ”ON” position. The light will re-
the buzzer sounds 4 to 8 seconds. blower, radio, etc., and drive directly to main on thereafter.
(c) Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Re- the nearest Toyota dealer or repair shop. If the light is flashing, we recommend that
minder Light you replace the engine oil at an early
NOTICE
This light remind you to buckle up the opportunity depending on the driving and
front passenger’s seat belt. Do not continue driving if the engine road condition. If the light comes on, re-
Once the ignition key is turned to ”ON” or drive belt is broken or loose. place it as soon as possible.
”START”, the reminder light flashes if a You need to reset the light after the en-
passenger sits in the front passenger seat (e) Engine Oil Replacement Reminder gine oil replacement. Reset the light by
and does not fasten the seat belt. Unless Light following the procedure below:
the front passenger fastens the belt, the 1. Turn the ignition key to the ”OFF” posi-
This light reminds you when to replace
light stays flashing. tion with the odometer reading shown.
the engine oil.
If luggage or other load is placed on the (For details, see “Odometer and trip me-
This light will come on when the ignition
front passenger seat, depending on its ter” on page 117).
switch is turned to ”ON”, and will go off
weight and how it is placed on the seat, 2. Turn the ignition key to the ”ON” posi-
after about a few seconds.
built−in sensors in the seat cushion may tion while holding down the ”ODO/
detect the pressure, causing the reminder TRIP” knob.
light to come on.
Hold down the knob until the light goes
off. Before the light goes off, it illuminates
for 3 seconds, flashes for 2 seconds, illu-
minates for 1 second.
121
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

If the system fails to reset, the light will If the lamp will not go off even after
remain flashing. the several trips... CAUTION
(f) Malfunction Indicator Lamp or
Be especially careful to prevent erro-
This lamp comes on when the ignition If the fuel tank is not empty or the fuel neous pedal operation.
key is turned to the “ON” position and tank cap is not loose...
goes off after the engine starts. This  There is a problem somewhere in the Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
means that the warning light system is engine, emission control system, elec- (I/M) programs
operating properly. tronic throttle control system, automatic
Your vehicle may not pass a state emis-
If the lamp remains on, or the lamp transmission electrical system or warn- sion inspection if the malfunction indicator
comes on while driving, first check the ing light system itself.
lamp remains on. Contact your Toyota
followings. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as dealer to check your vehicle’s emission
 Empty fuel tank possible to service the vehicle. control system and OBD (On−Board Diag-
If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immedi- If the engine speed does not increase with nostics) system before taking your vehicle
ately. the accelerator pedal depressed, there for the inspection.
 Loose fuel tank cap may be a problem somewhere in your For details, see “Emissions Inspection and
electronic throttle control system. Maintenance (I/M) programs” on page 260.
If the fuel tank cap is loose, securely
tighten it. At this time, vibration may occur. Howev- (g) Low Fuel Level Warning Light
er, if you depress the accelerator pedal
These cases are temporary malfunctions. This light comes on when the fuel level
more firmly and slowly, you can drive your in the tank becomes nearly empty. Fill up
The malfunction indicator lamp will go off vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle
after taking several driving trips. the tank as soon as possible.
checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as
If the lamp will not go off even after sev- possible.
eral trips, contact your Toyota dealer as Even if the abnormality of the electronic
soon as possible. throttle control system is corrected during
low speed driving, the system may not be
recovered until the engine is stopped and
the ignition key is turned to “ACC” or
“LOCK” position.

122
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

(h) SRS Warning Light If the light stays on, it indicates that the If either of the following conditions oc-
This light will come on when the igni- driver and passenger airbags have a prob- curs, this indicates a malfunction some-
tion key is turned to the ”ON” position. lem. If the light flashes, the side and cur- where in the components monitored by
After about 6 seconds, the light will go tain shield airbags and/or the seat belt the warning light system. Contact your
off. This means the system of the air- pretensioners have a problem. Toyota dealer as soon as possible to
bag and front seat belt pretensioners (i) ”ABS” Warning Light service the vehicle.
are operating properly. The light comes on when the ignition  The light does not come on when the
The warning light system monitors the air- key is turned to the “ON” position. If ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-
bag sensor assembly, front airbag sen- the anti−lock brake system and the tion, or remains on.
sors, side and curtain shield airbag sensor brake assist system work properly, the  The light comes on while you are driv-
assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor light turns off after a few seconds. ing.
assemblies, driver’s seat position sensor, Thereafter, if either of the systems mal- A warning light turning on briefly during
driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front seat functions, the light comes on again. operation does not indicate a problem.
belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
warning light, interconnecting wiring and the brake system warning light is off), the CAUTION
power sources. anti−lock brake system, the brake assist
If either of the following conditions occurs, system, the vehicle skid control system If the “ABS” warning light remains on
this indicates a malfunction somewhere in and/or active traction control system do/ together with the brake system warn-
the components monitored by the warning does not operate, but the brake system ing light, immediately stop your ve-
light system. Contact your Toyota dealer still operates conventionally. hicle at a safe place and contact your
as soon as possible to service the ve- When the “ABS” warning light is on (and Toyota dealer.
hicle. the brake system warning light is off), the In this case, not only the anti−lock
 The light does not come on when the anti−lock brake system does not operate brake system will fail but also the
ignition key is turned to the ”ON” posi- so that the wheels could lock up during vehicle will become extremely unsta-
tion or remains on. a sudden braking or braking on slippery ble during braking.
 The light comes on or flashes while road surfaces.
driving.

123
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Either of the following conditions may (l) Automatic Transmission Fluid Tem- (m) Vehicle Skid Control System and
occur, but do not indicate a malfunc- perature Warning Light Active Traction Control System
tion. This light warns that the automatic trans- Warning Light
 The light may stay on for about 60 mission fluid temperature is too high. This light warns that there is a problem
seconds after the ignition key is turned If this light comes on while you are driv- somewhere in the vehicle skid control sys-
to “ON” position. It is normal if it turns ing, slow down and pull off the road. Stop tem and/or active traction control system.
off after a while. the vehicle at a safe place and put the If the “VSC/TRAC” warning light and “VSC
 Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly selector lever in ”P” and leave the engine OFF” indicator light come on, have your
may turn on the light. It is normal if it idling until the light goes off. If the light vehicle checked by Toyota dealer as soon
turns off after a few seconds. goes off, you can start the vehicle again. as possible. However, it is no problem
(j) Open Door Warning Light If the light does not go off, call a Toyota that the “VSC/TRAC” warning light comes
dealer or qualified repair shop for assis- on when the brake actuator temperature
This light remains on until all the side tance. becomes high. (For details, see “Active
doors and back door are completely traction control system” on page 140.)
closed. NOTICE
The lights will come on with the ignition
(k) Unengaged ”Park” Warning Light key turned to “ON”, and will go off after
Continued driving with the warning
This light warns that the transmission light on may damage the automatic a few seconds.
”Park” mechanism is not engaged. If the transmission. The lights may come on for 60 seconds
four−wheel drive control is in the ”N” posi- after the ignition key is turned to “ON”
tion while the selector lever is in the ”P” position. It is normal if they go out after
position, the transmission will disengage a while.
and the wheels will not lock.
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly
may turn on the lights. it is normal if they
CAUTION
go out after a few seconds.
To restore the park function, shift the When the “VSC/TRAC” warning light and
four−wheel drive control out of ”N”, “VSC OFF” indicator light come on, the
or the vehicle can move. vehicle skid control system and/or active
traction control system are not operating,
but there is no problem if you continue to
drive.
124
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Trip information display

(n) Key Reminder Buzzer There may be the case that the ”ABS”,
This buzzer reminds you to remove the ”VSC/TRAC” and ”VSC OFF” stay on
key when you open the driver’s door with for about 60 seconds after the ignition
the ignition key in the ”ACC” or ”LOCK” key is turned to “ON” position. It is
position. normal if they go out after a while.
CHECKING SERVICE REMINDER INDICA- If any service reminder indicator or warn-
TORS (except the low fuel level warning ing buzzer does not function as described
light) above, have it checked by your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible.
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Open one of the side doors or back
door.
The open door warning light should
come on.
The following information is shown with
3. Close the door. the ignition key turned on. Each time
The open door warning light should go
you push the “MODE” button, the dis-
off.
played information is changed.
4. Place the four−wheel drive control lever
 Average vehicle speed
in ”N” position and the selector lever
in ”P” position.  Driving distance after engine starting
5. Turn the ignition key to ”ON”, but do  Available driving range
not start the engine.  Average fuel consumption after refuel-
All the service reminder indicators ex- ing
cept the open door warning light should
 Current fuel consumption
come on. The ”ABS”, ”VSC/TRAC”,
”VSC OFF”, ”TRAC”, and slip indicator The displayed cruise information values
light go off after a few seconds. The indicate the general driving condition and
SRS warning light goes off after about may not always reflect precise and actual
6 seconds. conditions.

125
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

 Average vehicle speed  Driving distance after engine starting  Available driving range
The average vehicle speed is calculated The driving distance after engine start- The available driving range is calcu-
and displayed based on the total driv- ing is displayed. lated and displayed depending on the
ing distance and the total driving time To begin recalculating, push the “RESET” amount of remaining fuel.
with the engine running. button for about 1 second.
The displayed value is updated every 10
seconds.
To begin recalculating, push the “RESET”
button for about 1 second.

126
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

 Average fuel consumption after re-  Current fuel consumption

fueling The current fuel consumption is calcu-
The average fuel consumption after re- lated and displayed based on the driv-
fueling is calculated and displayed ing distance and the fuel consumption
based on the total driving distance and per 2 second interval with the engine
the total fuel consumption after refuel- running.
ing. The value is updated every 2 seconds.
The value is updated every 10 seconds. If you are driving at low speeds just be-
When refueling, be sure to stop your ve- fore stopping, the accurate figure may not
hicle and turn the ignition key off. be shown.

127
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

128
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

SECTION 1− 6
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Ignition switch, Transmission and Parking brake
Ignition switch with steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Four–wheel drive system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Active traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Vehicle skid control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

129
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Ignition switch with steering

lock
”ACC”—Accessories such as the radio
operate, but the engine is off.
If you leave the key in the ”ACC” or
”LOCK” position and open the driver’s
door, a buzzer will remind you to remove
the key.
”LOCK”—Engine is off and the steering
wheel is locked. The key can be re-
moved only at this position.
To turn the key from ”ACC” to the ”LOCK”
position, you must put the selector lever
in the ”P” position.
Once you remove the key, the engine im-
”START”—Starter motor on. The key mobiliser system is automatically set. (See
will return to the ”ON” position when ”Engine immobiliser system” on page 12.)
released.
When starting the engine, the key may
For starting tips, see page 210. seem stuck at the ”LOCK” position. To
It is not a malfunction even if the needle free it, first be sure the key is pushed all
of the tachometer, fuel gauge, engine the way in, and then rock the steering
coolant temperature gauge, engine oil wheel slightly while turning the key gently.
pressure gauge or voltmeter returns to
bottom position when the ignition switch is NOTICE
turned to the “START” position.
Do not leave the key in the ”ON”
”ON”—Engine on and all accessories position if the engine is not running.
on. The battery will discharge and the
This is the normal driving position. electronic ignition system could be
damaged.

130
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Automatic transmission
Selector lever position

P: Parking, engine starting and key removal position

R: Reverse position
N: Neutral position
D: Normal driving position (Shifting into overdrive position)
4: Position for engine braking (Shifting into overdrive not possible)
3,2: Position for more powerful engine braking
L: Position for maximum engine braking

 The shift position is displayed on the instrument cluster

Driving pattern selector button for selecting a driving pattern suited to existing driving
conditions

“PWR” (power) mode for powerful acceleration

This indicator lights on the instrument panel

Normal mode for general driving condition

Second start mode selector button for selecting either second start mode or normal driving mode

Second start mode

This indicator lights on the instrument panel in the second
 Shift while pressing the brake pedal.
start mode
(Ignition switch must be in the “ON” posi-
tion)

When the cruise control is being used, even if you downshift from “D” to “4”, engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise control is
not cancelled. For ways to decrease the vehicle speed, see ”Cruise control” on page 138.

131
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Your automatic transmission has a shift 3. Release the parking brake and brake  Shift into the ”L” position. The trans-
lock system to minimize the possibility of pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal mission will downshift to first gear
incorrect operation. This means you can slowly for smooth starting. when the vehicle speed drops down to
only shift out of ”P” position when the (b) Using engine braking or lower than following speed for ”L”
brake pedal is depressed with the ignition position and maximum engine braking
switch in ”ON” position. To use engine braking, you can downshift will be enabled.
(a) Normal driving the transmission as follows:
Four –wheel drive control lever
1. Start the engine as instructed in ”How
 Shift into the “4” position. The trans- in ”H” . . . . . . . . . . . 43 km/h (27 mph)
mission will downshift to fourth gear
to start the engine” on page 210. The Four –wheel drive control lever
transmission must be in ”P” or ”N”. and engine braking will be enabled.
in ”L” . . . . . . . . . . . 17 km/h (11 mph)
2. With your foot holding down the brake
 Shift into the ”3” position. The trans-
mission will downshift to third gear When the cruise control is being used,
pedal, shift the selector lever to ”D”. even if you downshift from “D” to “4”,
when the vehicle speed drops down to
When the lever is in the ”D” position, the or lower than following speed for third engine braking will not be enabled be-
automatic transmission system will select gear, and more powerful engine braking cause the cruise control is not cancelled.
the most suitable gear for running condi- will be enabled. For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,
tions such as normal cruising, hill climb- see ”Cruise control” on page 138.
Four –wheel drive control lever
ing, hard towing, etc.
in ”H” . . . . . . . . . . . 124 km/h (77 mph)
Always use the “D” position for better fuel CAUTION
Four –wheel drive control lever
economy and quieter driving. If the engine
coolant temperature is low, the transmis- in ”L” . . . . . . . . . . . 49 km/h (31 mph) Be careful when downshifting on a
sion will not shift into the overdrive gear  Shift into the “2” position. The trans- slippery surface. Abrupt shifting
even in the “D” position. mission will downshift to second gear could cause the vehicle to spin or
when the vehicle speed drops down to skid.
CAUTION or lower than following speed for sec-
ond gear, and more powerful engine
Never put your foot on the accelera- braking will be enabled.
tor pedal while shifting. Four –wheel drive control lever
in ”H” . . . . . . . . . . . 83 km/h (52 mph)
Four –wheel drive control lever
in ”L” . . . . . . . . . . . 33 km/h (21 mph)
132
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

(c) Using ”3”, ”2” and ”L” positions (d) Backing up

NOTICE
The ”3”, ”2” and ”L” positions are used for 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
strong engine braking as described pre- z Be careful not to over-rev the en-
2. With the brake pedal held down with
viously. gine. Watch the tachometer to keep
your foot, shift the selector lever to the
engine rpm from going into the red
With the selector lever in ”3”, ”2” or ”L”, ”R” position.
zone. The approximate maximum al-
you can start the vehicle in motion as
lowable speed for each position is NOTICE
with the lever in ”D”.
given below for your reference:
With the selector lever in ”3” and ”2”, the Never shift into reverse while the ve-
km/h (mph)
vehicle will start in first gear and automat- hicle is moving.
Transmission Transfer
ically shift to third or second gear.
L H
With the selector lever in ”L”, the trans- 4 ....... 67 (42) 165 (102)
mission is engaged in first gear. 3 ....... 48 (30) 118 (73)
2 ....... 33 (20) 81 (50)
L ....... 19 (12) 47 (29)
z Do not continue hill climbing or
hard towing for a long time in the
”3”, ”2” or ”L” position. This may
cause severe automatic transmis-
sion damage from overheating. To
prevent such damage, ”4” position
should be used in hill climbing or
hard towing.

133
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

(e) Parking (f) Good driving practice (g) Driving in ”PWR” (Power) mode
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.  If the transmission repeatedly shifts up In the ”PWR” mode, the transmission is
2. Pull the parking brake lever up fully to and down between fourth gear and ov- shifted up and down at a higher vehicle
securely apply the parking brake. erdrive gears when climbing a gentle speed than in the Normal mode and a
slope, shift the selector lever to the ”4” more powerful acceleration is achieved. To
3. With the brake pedal pressed down, position. Be sure to shift the selector set the ”PWR” mode, push in the driving
shift the selector lever to the ”P” posi- lever to the ”D” position immediately pattern selector button. The ”PWR” mode
tion. afterward. indicator light comes on.
If the four–wheel drive control is in the  When towing a trailer, in order to main- For ordinary driving, Toyota recommends
”N” position while the selector lever is in tain engine braking efficiency, do not using the Normal mode to improve fuel
the ”P” position, the transmission will use overdrive. economy.
damage and the wheels will not lock.
(h) If you cannot shift the selector le-
CAUTION ver out of ”P” position
CAUTION
Always keep your foot on the brake If you cannot shift the selector lever from
While the vehicle is moving, never the ”P” position even though the brake
pedal while stopped with the engine
attempt to move the selector lever pedal is depressed, use the shift lock
running. This prevents the vehicle
into ”P” position under any circum- from creeping. override button. For instructions, see ”If
stances. Serious mechanical damage you cannot shift automatic transmission
and loss of vehicle control may re- selector lever” on page 245.
sult. NOTICE
Always use the brake pedal or the
parking brake to hold the vehicle on
an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold
the vehicle using the accelerator ped-
al, as this can cause the transmission
to overheat.

134
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Four–wheel drive system—

(a) Four–wheel drive contro l
(i) Driving in ”2nd STRT” (second Use the center differential lock system if
start) mode your wheels get stuck in a ditch, or when
In the ”2nd STRT” (Second start) mode, you are driving on a slippery or bumpy
the transmission system shifts up from surface. When the center differential is
second gear. Use this mode when starting locked, the vehicle skid control system is
your vehicle in sand, mud, ice or snow. automatically turned off and the center dif-
ferential lock and “VSC OFF” indicator
To set the ”2nd STRT” mode, push the lights come on because the function that
”2nd” button. In the ”2nd STRT” mode, the controls engine performance interferes
”2nd STRT” indicator light comes on. with the process of freeing your wheels.
The ”PWR” mode is automatically can-
celled when you push the ”2nd” button. NOTICE
As soon as the center differential lock
switch is turned on, the “VSC OFF”
Use the four−wheel drive control lever
indicator light comes on. After the
and center differential lock button to
wheels are out of the ditch or off the
select the transfer and center differen-
slippery or bumpy surface, turn the
tial modes.
center differential lock switch off.
The “H” and “L” position of the four−wheel Make sure the center differential lock
drive control lever provides either lock or indicator light and vehicle skid con-
unlock mode of the center differential de- trol system off indicator light turn off.
pending on the center differential lock but-
ton position.
“H” (high speed position, center differ-
ential unlocked): Lever at “H”, center dif-
ferential lock button left out
Use this for normal driving on all types of
roads, from dry hard−surfaced roads to
wet, icy or snow−covered roads. This
position gives greater economy, quietest
ride, least wear and better vehicle control.

135
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

“H” (high speed position, center differ- “L” (low speed position, center differen- Advice for driving on slippery roads in
ential locked): Lever at “H”, center differ- tial locked): Lever at “L”, center differen- “L” (low speed position) mode
ential lock button pushed in tial lock button pushed in. If you shift the four−wheel drive control
Use this for greater traction when you Use this for maximum power and traction. lever to “L” and the automatic transmis-
experience a loss of power, such as Use this for hard pulling in situations the sion lever to “2” when you drive in steep
wheel slipping, in the center differential vehicle cannot negotiate even in the “L” off−road areas, the output of the brake
unlock mode. (low speed position, center differential un− can be controlled effectively by the active
“N” (neutral position): Lever at “N” locked) mode. Also, using this mode when traction control system, which assists the
driving down steep off−road inclines will driver to control the driving power of 4
No power is delivered to the wheels. The help contribute to increased vehicle stabil- wheels.
vehicle must be stopped. ity. Use the “L” position of the automatic
“L” (low speed position, center differen- The indicator light tells when the differen- transmission lever for maximum power
tial unlocked): Lever at “L”, center differ- tial lock is engaged. Note that the differ- and traction when your wheels get stuck
ential lock button left out ential is not still locked as long as the or when you drive down a steep incline.
Use this for maximum power and traction. indicator light remains off. In the following cases, the output of the
Use this for climbing or descending steep If the indicator light does not go off when brake can be controlled by the active trac-
hills, off−road driving, and hard pulling in you push out the center differential lock tion control system if the engine speed is
sand or mud. button, drive straight ahead while acceler- under 3,000 rpm (normally engine speed
In this mode, the braking feeling that oc- ating or decelerating, or drive in reverse. is under 3,000 rpm when the wheels get
curs when the wheels are negotiating a unstuck).
See “(b) Shifting procedure” for further in-
sharp corner is further reduced than in the structions.  The four−wheel drive control lever in
“L” (low position, center differential locked) the “L” position and the automatic
mode. transmission lever in the “L” position or
the automatic transmission lever in the
“D”, ”4”, ”3” or “2” with the transmis-
sion downshifting to the first gear

136
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

(b) Shifting procedure Parking brake

 The four−wheel drive control lever in SHIFTING BETWEEN “H” (UNLOCKED)
the “L” position and the automatic AND “H” (LOCKED)
transmission lever in the “R” position To shift between unlock and lock
(As for the automatic transmission lever modes in “H”, push the center differential
positions, see “Automatic transmission” on lock button.
page 131.) SHIFTING BETWEEN “L” (UNLOCKED)
AND “L” (LOCKED)
To shift between unlock and lock
modes in “L”, push the center differential
lock button.
SHIFTING BETWEEN “H” AND “L”
Stop the vehicle, put the transmission into
“N” and move the four−wheel drive control
When parking, firmly apply the parking
lever. brake to avoid inadvertent creeping.

CAUTION To set: Pull up the lever. For better hold-

ing power, first depress the brake pedal
Never move the four –wheel drive con- and hold it while setting the parking
trol lever if wheels are slipping. Wait brake.
until the wheels have stopped slip- To release: Pull up the lever slightly (1),
ping or spinning before shifting. press the lock release button (2), and low-
er (3).
To remind you that the parking brake is
set, the parking brake reminder light in
the instrument panel remains on until you
release the parking brake.

137
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Cruise control
The cruise control allows you to cruise
CAUTION the vehicle at a desired speed over CAUTION
about 40 km/h (25 mph) even with your
Before driving, be sure the parking foot off the accelerator pedal.  To help maintain maximum control
brake is fully released and the park- of your vehicle, do not use the
Your cruising speed can be maintained
ing brake reminder light is off. cruise control when driving in
within the limits of engine performance,
heavy or varying traffic, or on slip-
although a slight speed change may occur
pery (rainy, icy or snow –covered) or
when driving up or down the grades. On
winding roads.
steeper hills, a greater speed change will
occur so it is better to drive without the  Avoid vehicle speed increases when
cruise control. driving downhill. If the vehicle
speed is too fast in relation to the
When the cruise control is on, the driving cruise control set speed, cancel the
pattern of the automatic transmission is
cruise control then downshift the
fixed in the normal position, regardless of
transmission to use engine braking
the position of the driving pattern selector to slow down.
switch.

138
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

If you need acceleration—for example,

when passing—depress the accelerator
pedal enough for the vehicle to exceed
the set speed. When you release it, the
vehicle will return to the speed set prior
to the acceleration.
CANCELLING THE PRESET SPEED
You can cancel the preset speed by:
a. Pulling the control lever in the
”CANCEL” direction and releasing it.
b. Depressing the brake pedal.
If the vehicle speed falls below about 40
km/h (25 mph), the preset speed will auto-
TURNING THE SYSTEM ON SETTING AT A DESIRED SPEED
matically cancel out.
To operate the cruise control, push the The transmission must be in ”D” before
If the vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10
”ON·OFF” switch. This turns the system you set the cruise control speed.
on. The indicator light in the instrument mph) below the preset speed, the preset
Bring your vehicle to the desired speed, speed will also automatically cancel out.
panel shows that you can now set the push the lever down in the ”– SET” direc-
vehicle at a desired cruising speed. Anoth- tion and release it. This sets the vehicle If the preset speed automatically cancels
er push on the switch will turn the system at that speed. out for other than the above cases, have
completely off. your vehicle checked by your Toyota deal-
If the speed is not satisfactory, tap the er at the earliest opportunity.
lever up for a faster speed, or tap it down
CAUTION
for a slower speed. Each tap changes the
To avoid accidental cruise control en- set speed by 1.6 km/h (1.0 mph). You can
now take your foot off the accelerator
gagement, keep the ”ON·OFF” switch
off when not using the cruise control. pedal.

139
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Active traction control system

RESETTING TO A FASTER SPEED RESUMING THE PRESET SPEED
Push the lever up in the ”+ RES” direction If the preset speed is cancelled by pulling
and hold it. Release the lever when the the control lever or by depressing the
desired speed is attained. While the lever brake pedal, pushing the lever up in the
is held up, the vehicle will gradually gain ”+ RES” direction will restore the speed
speed. set prior to cancellation.
However, a faster way to reset is to ac- However, once the vehicle speed falls be-
celerate the vehicle and then push the low about 40 km/h (25 mph), the preset
control lever down in the ”– SET” direc- speed will not be resumed.
tion. CRUISE CONTROL FAILURE WARNING
RESETTING TO A SLOWER SPEED If the ”CRUISE” indicator light in the
Push the lever down in the ”– SET” direc- instrument cluster flashes when using the
tion and hold it. Release the lever when cruise control, press the ”ON·OFF” button Active traction control system indicator
the desired speed is attained. While the to turn the system off and then press it light
lever is held down, the vehicle speed will again to turn it on.
The active traction control system auto-
gradually decrease. If any of the following conditions then oc- matically helps control the spinning of
However, a faster way to reset is to de- curs, there is some trouble in the cruise 4 wheels which may occur when accel-
press the brake pedal and then push the control system. erating on slippery road surfaces, by
control lever down in the ”– SET” direc-  The indicator light does not come on. controlling the output of the brake and
tion. engine. Thus, the system assists driver
 The indicator light flashes again.
Even if you downshift the transmission to control the driving power of 4
from the ”D” position to ”4” with the cruise  The indicator light goes out after it wheels. When you turn the ignition
control on, engine braking will not be ap- comes on. switch on, the active traction control
plied because the cruise control is not If this is the case, contact your Toyota system always turns on automatically,
cancelled. To decrease the vehicle speed, dealer and have your vehicle inspected. and the active traction control indicator
reset to a slower speed with the cruise light will come on. The indicator light
control lever or depress the brake pedal. will go off after a few seconds.
If you use the brake pedal, cruise control
is cancelled.

140
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

When active traction control is applied, The brake actuator temperature increases
the active traction control system indi- during the active traction control system
cator light blinks. or vehicle skid control system operating.
You may hear a sound in the engine If the brake actuator temperature becomes
compartment for a few seconds when the too high while the active traction control
engine is started or just after the vehicle system or vehicle skid control system is
begins to move. This means that the ac- operating, a buzzer will start to sound
tive traction control system is in the self− intermittently to indicate that the active
check mode, and does not indicate mal- traction control system can no longer op-
function. When the active traction control erate. In this case, immediately stop your
system is operating, you may feel vibra- vehicle at a safe place. If the system
tion or hear noise of your vehicle, caused continues to operate, the buzzer sound
by operation of the brakes. This indicates changes from intermittent to continuous.
the system is functioning properly. (The continuous buzzer sounds for about
Active traction control system failure 3 seconds.) At the time, the “VSC/TRAC”
When getting the vehicle out of mud or warning warning light will come on and the traction
new snow, etc. the active traction control control system temporarily stops operating
system will help operate to prevent the This light warns when there is a problem
in order to protect the brake actuator. (Al-
wheels from spinning. somewhere in the active traction control
though the active traction control system
system.
does not operate, there is no problem to
If the “VSC/TRAC” warning light comes continue your driving.) The system will be
on, have your vehicle checked by your automatically restored after a short time
Toyota dealer as soon as possible. and “VSC/TRAC” warning light goes off if
the accelerator pedal is released.
When the “ABS” warning light come on,
the active traction control system is not
operating.
The “VSC/TRAC” warning light will come
on when the ignition key is turned “ON”,
and will go off after a few seconds.

141
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Vehicle skid control system

The “VSC/TRAC” warning light may stay The vehicle skid control system helps
on for 60 seconds after the ignition key CAUTION provide integrated control of the sys-
is turned to “ON” position. It is normal if tems such as anti−lock brake, traction
it goes off after a few seconds. Under certain slippery road condi- control, engine control, etc. This sys-
tions, full traction of the vehicles and tem automatically controls the output of
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly
power to 4 wheels may not be main- the brakes or engine to help prevent
may turn on the “VSC/TRAC” warning
tained, even though the active trac- the vehicle from skidding under adverse
light. It is normal if it goes off after a few
tion control system is in operation. conditions.
seconds.
Do not drive the vehicle under any
When the “VSC/TRAC” warning light The vehicle skid control system activates
speed or maneuvering conditions
comes on the active traction control sys- when the vehicle speed is more than the
which will cause the vehicle to lose
tem is not operating, but there is no prob- following speed.
traction. In situations where the road
lem if you continue to drive. surface is covered with ice or snow, Four−wheel drive control lever in “H”
In the following cases, contact your Toyota your vehicle should be fitted with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 km/h (9 mph)
dealer: snow tires or tire chains. Always Four−wheel drive control lever in “L”
drive at an appropriate and cautious
 The “VSC/TRAC” warning light does not speed for the road conditions pres-
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 km/h (19 mph)
come on after the ignition key is turned You may hear a sound in the engine
ent.
“ON”. compartment for a few seconds when the
 The “VSC/TRAC” remains on after the engine is started or just after the vehicle
ignition key is turned “ON”. begins to move. This means that the ve-
hicle skid control system is in the self−
check mode and does not indicate a mal-
function.

142
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

CAUTION

 Active traction control system, ve-

hicle skid control system and anti−
lock brake system are electronic
systems designed to help the driver
maintain control under adverse con-
ditions. They are not a substitute
for safe driving practices. Factors
including speed, road conditions
and driver steering input can all af-
fect whether active traction control
system, vehicle skid control system
and anti−lock brake system will be If the vehicle is going to skid during driv- Pushing the center differential lock button
effective in preventing a loss of ing, the slip indicator light flashes and an automatically turns the vehicle skid control
control. Always keep safety driving alarm sounds intermittently. system off. At this time, the “VSC OFF”
in mind. If the slip indicator light indicator comes on with the center differ-
flashes, sounding an alarm, special When you turn the ignition switch on, the
slip indicator light will come on. The slip ential lock indicator light. (For details, see
care should be taken while driving. “Four−wheel drive system—(a)Four−wheel
indicator light will go off after a few sec-
 Only use tires of specified size. The onds. drive control” on page 135.)
size, manufacturer, brand and tread
pattern for all 4 tires should be the
same. If you use the tires other
than specified, or different type or
size, the vehicle skid control sys-
tem may not function correctly.
When replacing the tires or wheels,
contact your Toyota dealer. (See
“Checking and replacing tires” on
page 275.)

143
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

When the “ABS” warning light comes on,

the vehicle skid control system is not op- CAUTION
erating.
The “VSC/TRAC” warning light and “VSC  Active traction control system, ve-
OFF” indicator light will come on when the hicle skid control system and anti−
ignition key is turned “ON”, and will go off lock brake system are electronic
after a few seconds. systems designed to help the driver
The “VSC/TRAC” warning light and “VSC maintain control under adverse con-
OFF” indicator light may stay on for 60 ditions. They are not a substitute
seconds after the ignition key is turned to for safe driving practices. Factors
“ON” position. It is normal if they go off including speed, road conditions
after a few seconds. and driver steering input can all af-
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly fect whether active traction control
may turn on the lights. It is normal if they system, vehicle skid control system
Vehicle skid control system failure go off after a few seconds. and anti−lock brake system will be
warning When the “VSC/TRAC” warning light and effective in preventing a loss of
“VSC OFF” indicator light come on, the control. Always keep safety driving
These lights warn when there is a prob- in mind. If the slip indicator light
vehicle skid control system is not operat-
lem somewhere in the vehicle skid control flashes, sounding an alarm, special
ing, but there is no problem if you contin-
system or active traction control system. care should be taken while driving.
ue to drive.
If the “VSC/TRAC” warning light and “VSC In the following cases, contact your Toyota  Only use tires of specified size. The
OFF” indicator light come on, have your dealer: size, manufacturer, brand and tread
vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer as  The “VSC/TRAC” warning light, “VSC pattern for all 4 tires should be the
soon as possible. However, there is no OFF” indicator light and slip indicator same. If you use the tires other
problem if the “VSC/TRAC” warning light light do not come on after the ignition than specified, or different type or
comes on when the brake actuator tem- key is turned “ON”. size, the vehicle skid control sys-
perature becomes high. (For details, see  The “VSC/TRAC” warning light and tem may not function correctly.
“Active traction control system” on page “VSC OFF” indicator light remain on af- When replacing the tires or wheels,
140.) ter the ignition key is turned “ON”. contact your Toyota dealer. (See
 The “VSC OFF” indicator light comes “Checking and replacing tires” on
on while driving without pushing the page 275.)
center differential lock switch.
144
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

SECTION 1− 7
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Car audio system
Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Using your audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Car audio system operating hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Rear seat audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Audio remote controls (steering switches) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

For vehicle equipped with Navigation system, please refer to the

separate “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

145
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Using your audio system—

Reference —some basics
This section describes some of the basic TONE AND BALANCE
features on Toyota audio systems. Some For details about your system’s tone and
information may not pertain to your sys- balance controls, see the description of
tem. your own system.
Your audio system works when the ignition Tone
key is in the ”ACC” or ”ON” position.
How good an audio program sounds to
TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF you is largely determined by the mix of
Push ”PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system the treble, midrange, and bass levels. In
on and off. fact, different kinds of music and vocal
Push ”AM”, ”FM”, ”TAPE” or ”DISC” to programs usually sound better with differ-
turn on that function without pushing ent mixes of treble, midrange, and bass.
”PWR·VOL”. Balance
AM·FM radio/cassette player/compact disc You can turn on each player by inserting A good balance of the left and right stereo
changer controller/compact disc player a cassette tape or compact disc. channels and of the front and rear sound
with changer levels is also important.
You can turn off each player by ejecting
the cassette tape or compact disc. If the Keep in mind that if you are listening to
audio system was previously off, then the a stereo recording or broadcast, changing
entire audio system will be turned off the right/left balance will increase the vol-
when you eject the cassette tape or com- ume of one group of sounds while de-
pact disc. If the another function was pre- creasing the volume of another.
viously playing, it will come on again.
SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS
Push ”AM”, ”FM”, ”TAPE” or ”DISC” if the
system is already on but you want to
switch from one function to another.

146
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

YOUR RADIO ANTENNA

NOTICE
Lowering the antenna
z To prevent damage to the antenna,
The antenna automatically extends when
make sure it is retracted before
the radio is on or the radio system is on,
driving your Toyota through an au-
and retracts when the radio mode is off.
tomatic car wash.
However, even if you turn off the radio
when the radio on the rear seat audio z The antenna mast has to be ex-
system is on, the antenna does not re- tended higher than 100 mm (3.94
tract. To lower a power antenna, push the in.) length when the audio is on.
”Ɲ” (down) switch. Also, the antenna au- Extend the antenna mast when the
tomatically goes down when the radio radio signal is weak. Down Up
mode is switched off to turn on the cas- z Putting a window tint (especially,
sette tape player or compact disc player, conductive or metallic type) on the
turning off the audio system by pushing right−hand rear quarter window may Adjusting the power antenna
”PWR·VOL” or turning the ignition key to affect the reception of radio or mo-
”LOCK” position. To adjust the antenna height, push the
bile telephone. For the installation
switch.
Some models also have an antenna of the window tint, consult with
printed on the inside of the right side your Toyota dealer. Confirm that no one is close enough to
quarter window. get pushed before extending the antenna.
Clean the antenna mast periodically with
a clean dry cloth.

147
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

YOUR CASSETTE PLAYER

When you insert a cassette, the exposed
tape should be to the right.

NOTICE
Do not oil any part of the player and
do not insert anything other than cas-
sette tapes into the slot, or the tape
player may be damaged.

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER

When you insert a disc, gently push it in
with the label side up. (The player will
automatically eject a disc if the label side NOTICE
is down.)
z Do not stack up two discs for in-
The discs set in the player are played
sertion, or it will cause damage the
continuously, starting with disc number 1.
compact disc player. Insert only one
The disc number of the disc currently be-
compact disc into slot at a time.
ing played, the track number and the time
from the beginning of the program appear z Never try to disassemble or oil any
on the display. part of the compact disc player. Do
not insert anything other than com-
When play of one disc ends, the first
pact discs into the slot.
track of the following disc starts. When
play of the final disc ends, play of the
first disc starts again. The player is intended for use with 12 cm
(4.7 in.) discs only.
The player will skip any empty disc num-
ber.

148
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Controls and features

Details of specific buttons, controls, and
features are described in the alphabetical
list that follows.

149
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons) Compact disc (Program)

These buttons are used to preset and To eject one compact disc only: Push and
Push “ ” to select the other side of a
tune in radio stations. release the compact disc eject button. If
you hold the button too long (if the audio cassette tape. The display indicates which
To preset a station to a button: Tune in side is currently selected (“ ” indicates
the desired station (see “AUDIO−TUNE” system is on at this time, you hear a
knob or “SEEK” button). Push and hold beep.), the mechanism will change to the top side, “ ” indicates bottom side).
down the button until you hear a mode for ejecting all the discs loaded in
Auto−reverse feature: After the cassette
beep—this will set the station to the but- the changer. You can also eject any spe-
player reaches the end of a tape side, it
ton. The button number will appear on the cific one of the discs loaded in the player
automatically reverses and begins to play
display. as follows:
the other side. This is true whether the
1. Push either side of the “DISC” button
To tune in to a preset station: Push the cassette was playing or fast forwarding.
until the number of the disc you want
button for the station you want. The but- to eject is displayed. (Reverse/Fast forward buttons)
ton number and station frequency will ap- 2. Push and release the compact disc
pear on the display. Cassette Player
eject button.
These systems can store one AM and two Push the fast forward button to fast for-
To eject all the discs loaded in the player: ward a cassette tape. “FF” will appear on
FM stations for each button (The display Push and hold the compact disc eject but-
will show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when you the display. Push the reverse button to
ton (until you hear a beep when the audio rewind a tape. “REW” will appear on the
push “AM” “FM”). system is on). The last compact disc display.
(Eject button) played before pushing the button will be
ejected first. If a disc is left in the slot To stop the tape while it is fast forward-
Cassette tape for a long time, the function to eject all ing, push the fast forward button or
Push the cassette tape eject button to the discs will be automatically cancelled. “TAPE”; to stop the tape while it is re-
eject a cassette. winding, push the reverse button or
“TAPE”.

150
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

If a tape side rewinds completely, the cas- AUDIO−TUNE Knob Manual tuning function—
sette player will stop and then play that This knob is used to adjust the tone and Turn the knob. The radio will step up or
same side. If a tape fast forwards com- balance or to tune the station manually on down to another frequency.
pletely, the cassette player will play the the radio mode.
other side of the tape, using the auto−re- DISC (Compact Disc) button
verse feature. Tone and sound balance adjustment func- Push “DISC” to switch from radio or cas-
tion— sette operation to compact disc operation.
Compact Disc Player
Each time you push the ”AUDIO−TUNE” If the audio system is off, you can turn
If you want to fast forward or reverse knob, the display changes as in the fol- on the compact disc player by pushing
through a compact disc track, push and lowing. To adjust the tone and balance or “DISC”. In both cases, a disc must alrea-
hold in the fast forward or reverse button. turn on or off the automatic sound leveliz- dy be loaded in the player.
When you release the button, the compact er, turn the knob.
disc player will resume playing. When the audio is set into compact disc
BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. operation, the display shows the track or,
AM button track and disc number currently being
MID: Adjusts mid−pitched tones.
Push “AM” to turn on the radio and select played.
the AM band. “AM” will appear on the TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones.
If the player or another unit equipped with
display. BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between the player malfunctions, your audio system
If the audio system is off, you can turn the right and left speakers. will display one of the three following er-
on the radio by pushing “AM”. Also, push FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between ror messages.
“AM” to switch from cassette or compact the front and rear speakers. If “WAIT” appears on the display, it indi-
disc operation to radio operation. ASL: Turns on or off the automatic sound cates that the inside of the player unit
levelizer. may be too hot due to the very high ambi-
Automatic sound levelizer: When the au- ent temperature. Remove the disc from
dio sound becomes difficult to be heard the player and allow the player to cool
due to road noise, wind noise, etc. during down.
driving, the system adjusts to the optimum If “Err 1” appears on the display, it
volume and tone quality according to the indicates the disc is dirty, damaged or
noise level. While the automatic sound label face down. Clean the disc or insert
levelizer is on, ”ASL” appears on the dis- it correctly.
play.

151
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

If “Err 3” appears on the display, it FM button Loading one compact disc only—
indicates there is a trouble inside the sys- Push “FM” to turn on the radio and select To load one compact disc only, quickly
tem. Eject the disc. Set the disc again. the FM band. “FM1” or “FM2” will appear push and release the button. If you hold
If the malfunction is not rectified, take on the display. This system allows you to the button too long (if the audio system
your vehicle to your Toyota dealer. set six stations in FM1 and six stations is on at this time, you hear a beep.), the
DISC ƝƜ in FM2. mechanism will change to the mode for
If the audio system is off, you can turn loading multiple compact discs. After
By using this button, you can select a pushing the button, insert a compact disc.
disc you wish to listen to. on the radio by pushing “FM”. Also, push
“FM” to switch from cassette or compact At this time, the indicators on both sides
Push either side of the button until the disc operation to radio operation. of the slot are flashing. After the disc is
number of the disc you want to listen to loaded, the shutter of the slot will close
appears on the display. LOAD button and the indicators will stop flashing.
This button is used to load the compact
Dolby B NR∗ If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter
discs in the compact disc auto changer will close after 15 seconds.
If you are listening to a tape that was which is integrated with the radio and cas-
recorded with Dolby B Noise Reduction, sette player. This compact disc auto Loading multiple compact discs—
push the “ ” button. The “ ” will ap- changer can store up to 6 discs. To load multiple compact discs, push and
pear on the display. Push the button again The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON” hold (until you hear a beep when the au-
to turn off Dolby B NR. position. dio system is on). After pushing the but-
ton, insert the first compact disc. At this
The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noise time, the indicators on both sides of the
by about 10 dB. For best sound reproduc- slot are flashing. After the disc is loaded,
tion, play your tapes with this button on the shutter of the slot will close and the
or off according to the mode used for indicators will stop flashing. After a few
recording the tape. seconds, the shutter will automatically
∗ : Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from
open again so the next disc can be in-
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and the
double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories serted. The same process can be applied
Licensing Corporation. for loading the rest of the discs.
If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter
will close after 15 seconds.

152
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume) knob RDS (Radio Date system) button Compact Disc Player
Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system When you push this button briefly during There are two repeat features—You can
on and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust the FM reception, the RDS turns on. ”RDS” either replay a disc track or a whole com-
volume. and ”RDS SEARCH” appear on the display pact disc.
RAND (Random) and the radio starts to search RDS sta- Repeating a track:
tions.
There are two random features—you can Quickly push and release “ ” while the
either listen to the tracks on all the com- If no RDS stations can be found, ”NO track is playing. “ ” will appear on the
pact discs in the player in random order, RDS ST” appears and the display returns
display. If you hear a beep, you held the
or only listen to the tracks on a specific to the previous mode. button too long, and the player will repeat
compact disc in random order. If RDS stations are found, ”FOUND **ST” the whole disc. When the track ends, it
To randomly play for the tracks on a disc: appears on the display (**indicating the will automatically be replayed. This pro-
number of stations which are found) in the cess will be continued until you push the
Quickly push and release “ ”. “ ”
FM TYPE mode and the RDS stations are button again to turn off the repeat feature.
will appear on the display. The disc you
preset by program type.
are listening to will play in random order. Repeating a disc:
If you hear a beep, you held the button To turn off the RDS, push the button until Push and hold “ ” until you hear a
too long, and the player will play all the you hear a beep.
beep. “ ” will appear on the display.
tracks in the player in random order. To RPT (Repeat) The player will repeat all the tracks on the
turn off the random feature, push this but- disc you are listening to. When the disc
Cassette Player
ton again. ends, the player will automatically go back
To randomly play for all the tracks in the Push “ ” while the track is playing.
to the first track of the disc and replay.
player: “ ” will appear on the display. When This process will be continued until you
Push and hold “ ” until you hear a the track ends, it will automatically be push the button again to turn off the re-
rewound and replayed. This process will peat feature.
beep. “ ” will appear on the dis-
be continued until you push the button
play and the player will perform all the again to turn off the repeat feature.
tracks on all the discs in the player in
random order. To turn off the random fea- There must be at least 3 seconds of blank
ture, push this button again. space between tracks in order for the re-
peat feature to work correctly.

153
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

SCAN button Scanning the tracks on a disc: Cassette Player

Radio Quickly push and release “SCAN”. “SCAN” By using this button, you can skip up or
will appear on the display and the player down to a different track.
You can either scan all the frequencies on will scan all the tracks on the disc you
a band or scan only the preset stations are listening to. If you hear a beep, you You can skip up to nine tracks at a time.
for that band. held the button too long, and the player Push the right or left side of the button.
To scan the preset stations: will scan the first track of all the discs in “FF 1” or “REW 1” will appear on the
Push and hold “SCAN” until you hear a the player. To select a track, push “SCAN” display.
beep. The radio will tune in the next pres- again. If the player scanned all the tracks Next, push either side of the ”SEEK
et station up the band, stay there for 5 on the disc, it will stop scanning. TRACK” button until the number on the
seconds, and then move to the next pre- Scanning the first track of all the discs in display reaches the number of tracks you
set station. To select a station, push the player: want to skip. If you push the button ten
“SCAN” again. Push “SCAN” until you hear a beep. times, the skip feature will be turned off.
To scan all the frequencies: “ ·SCAN” will appear on the display When counting the number of tracks you
Quickly push and release “SCAN”. If you want to rewind, remember to count the
and the player will perform the first track
hear a beep, you held the button too long, current track as well. For example, if you
and the radio will scan the preset sta- of the next disc. To select a disc, push
the “SCAN” again. If the player has want to rewind to a song that is two be-
tions. The radio will find the next station fore the song you are listening to, push
scanned all the discs, it will stop scan-
up the station band, stay there for 5 se- on the left side of the button until “REW
conds, and then scan again. To select a ning.
3” appears on the display.
station, push “SCAN” again. SEEK TRACK button
If you have pushed the track button more
Compact disc player Radio than you wanted to, push the other side
There are two scan features—you can ei- In the seek mode, the radio finds and of the button. The track number will be
ther scan the tracks on a specific disc or plays the next station up or down the reduced.
scan the first tracks of all the discs in the station band.
The track number you select is not valid
player. To seek a station, quickly push and re- if it is higher than the number of tracks
lease the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ”. Do this again to remaining on the current cassette side.
find another station.
 After the beginning of the tape is
reached, the player will automatically
start playing the same side.
154
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

 After the end of the tape is reached, TAPE button If there is no radio text message in
the player will automatically reverse Push “TAPE” to switch from radio or com- memory and when no message is re-
sides and start playing the other side. pact disc operation to cassette operation. ceived, ”NO MESSAGE” appears on the
There must be at least 3 seconds of blank If the audio system is off, you can turn display. After this, the display returns to
space between tracks for the track button on the cassette player by pushing “TAPE”. the previous mode.
to work correctly. In addition, the feature In both cases, a cassette must already be Compact disc player
may not work well with some spoken loaded in the player. This button is used to change the display
word, live, or classical recordings. TEXT button for the compact disc that contains text
Compact disc player Radio data.
By using this button, you can skip up or If the radio receives a radio text message To change the display, quickly push and
down to a different track. during FM reception, ”MSG” and a text release the ”TEXT” button while the com-
Push either side of the ”SEEK TRACK” message appears on the display. After the pact disc is playing. The display changes
button until the number of the track you text message goes off, ”MSG” also goes in the order from the elapsed time to disc
want to listen to appears on the display. off. title to track title, then back to the
If you want to return to the beginning of elapsed time.
After the text message goes off from the
the current track, push the left side of the display, pushing the button during mes- If this button is pushed while a compact
button one time, quickly. sage reception shows the text message disc that does not contain text data is
ST (Stereo reception) display again on the display. playing, ”NO TITLE” will appear on the
display.
Your radio automatically changes to stereo The RDS audio system can store three
reception when a stereo broadcast is re- messages consisting of 64 characters in If the entire disc or track title does not
ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If the memory. To store a message in memory, appear on the display, push and hold the
signal becomes weak, the radio reduces push the button until you hear a beep. button until you hear a beep. The rest of
the amount of channel separation to prev- the title will appear.
If three messages are already stored in
ent the weak signal from creating noise. memory, the oldest message will be over-
If the signal becomes extremely weak, the written by the new message.
radio switches from stereo to mono recep-
tion. To recall a radio text message, push the
button. Each time you push the button,
the available messages will be displayed
beginning with the newest one.
155
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Car audio system operating

hints
TRAF (Traffic announcement function) Here are some common reception prob-
NOTICE
button lems that probably do not indicate a prob-
A station that regularly broadcasts traf- To ensure correct audio system op- lem with your radio:
fic information is automatically located. erations: FM
When you push the ”TRAF” button, ”TRAF z Be careful not to spill beverages Fading and drifting stations—Generally, the
SEEK” appears on the display and the over the audio system. effective range of FM is about 40 km (25
radio will start seeking any traffic program z Do not put anything other than a miles). Once outside this range, you may
station. cassette tape or Compact Disc into notice fading and drifting, which increase
If no traffic program station is found, ”NO the slot. with the distance from the radio transmit-
TRAF INFO” appears on the display for a ter. They are often accompanied by distor-
z The use of a cellular phone inside
few seconds and the display returns to tion.
or near the vehicle may cause a
the previous mode. noise from the speakers of the au- Multi−path—FM signals are reflective,
TYPE (Program type) button dio system which you are listening making it possible for two signals to reach
to. However, this does not indicate your antenna at the same time. If this
When you push this button while receiving happens, the signals will cancel each oth-
a malfunction.
an RDS station, the current program type er out, causing a momentary flutter or
appears on the display. loss of reception.
RADIO RECEPTION
Each time you push the button, the pro- Static and fluttering—These occur when
gram type changes as in the following: Usually, a problem with radio reception
signals are blocked by buildings, trees, or
does not mean there is a problem with
 ROCK
your radio—it is just the normal result of
other large objects. Increasing the bass
 EASY LIS (Easy listening) conditions outside the vehicle.
level may reduce static and fluttering.

 CLS/JAZZ (Classical music and jazz) For example, nearby buildings and terrain
Station swapping—If the FM signal you
are listening to is interrupted or weak-
 R&B (Rhythm and Blues) can interfere with FM reception. Power
ened, and there is another strong station
lines or telephone wires can interfere with
 INFORM (Information)
AM signals. And of course, radio signals
nearby on the FM band, your radio may
 RELIGION have a limited range. The farther you are
tune in the second station until the origi-
nal signal can be picked up again.
 MISC from a station, the weaker its signal will
be. In addition, reception conditions
 ALERT (Emergency message)
change constantly as your vehicle moves.

156
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

AM Use high−quality cassettes. CARING FOR YOUR COMPACT DISC

Fading—AM broadcasts are reflected by  Low−quality cassette tapes can cause PLAYER AND DISCS
the upper atmosphere—especially at night. many problems, including poor sound,  The player is intended for use with
These reflected signals can interfere with inconsistent playing speed, and 12cm (4.7 in.) discs only.
those received directly from the radio sta- constant auto−reversing. They can also  Extremely high temperatures can keep
tion, causing the radio station to sound get stuck or tangled in the cassette your compact disc player from working.
alternately strong and weak. player. On hot days, use the air conditioning
Station interference—When a reflected sig-  Do not use a cassette if it has been to cool the vehicle interior before you
nal and a signal received directly from a damaged or tangled or if its label is listen to a disc.
radio station are very nearly the same peeling off.  Bumpy roads or other vibrations may
frequency, they can interfere with each  Do not leave a cassette in the player make your compact disc player skip.
other, making it difficult to hear the broad-
cast.
if you are not listening to it, especially  If moisture gets into your compact disc
if it is hot outside. player, you may not hear any sound
Static—AM is easily affected by external  Store cassettes in their cases and out even though your compact disc player
sources of electrical noise, such as high of direct sunlight. appears to be working. Remove the
tension power lines, lightening, or electri-
cal motors. This results in static.  Avoid using cassettes with a total play- disc from the player and wait until it
ing time longer than 100 minutes (50 dries.
CARING FOR YOUR CASSETTE PLAYER minutes per side). The tape used in
AND TAPES these cassettes is thin and could get CAUTION
For the best performance for your cas- stuck or tangled in the cassette player.
sette player and tapes: Compact disc players use an invisible
laser beam which could cause hazard-
Clean the tape head and other parts regu- ous radiation exposure if directed
larly. outside the unit. Be sure to operate
 A dirty tape head or tape path can the player correctly.
decrease sound quality and tangle your
cassette tapes. The easiest way to
clean them is by using a cleaning tape.
(A wet type is recommended.)

157
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Special shaped discs Labeled discs

 Use only compact discs marked as
shown above. The following products
may not be playable on your compact NOTICE
disc player.
Copy−protected CD To prevent damage to the player or
CD−R (CD−Recordable) changer, do not use special shaped,
CD−RW (CD−Re−writable) low quality or labeled discs such as
CD−ROM those shown in the illustrations.

Low quality discs

158
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Rear seat audio system

Correct Wrong

 Handle compact discs carefully, espe- To clean a compact disc: Wipe it with a In the rear seat, you can enjoy a differ-
cially when you are inserting them. soft, lint−free cloth that has been damp- ent mode from the one used on the
Hold them on the edge and do not ened with water. Wipe in a straight line front audio system, using headphones.
bend them. Avoid getting fingerprints from the center to the edge of the disc (a) Turning the system on and off
on them, particularly on the shiny side. (not in circles). Dry it with another soft,
”ON/SOURCE” button: Use this button to
 Dirt, scrapes, warping, pin holes, or lint−free cloth. Do not use a conventional
turn system on when the system is off.
other disc damage could cause the record cleaner or anti−static device.
When the system is turned on, the mode
player to skip or to repeat a section of changes by pushing this button.
a track. (To see a pin hole, hold the
disc up to the light.) ”OFF” button: Use this button to turn off
the system.
 Remove discs from the compact disc
player when you are not listening to ”Volume adjusting” knob: Use this knob
them. Store them in their plastic cases to adjust the volume.
away from moisture, heat, and direct
sunlight.

159
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Audio remote controls (steer-

ing switches)
(b) When the radio mode is selected (d) When the ”CD” mode is selected
” CH ” button: Push this button to ” DISC ” button: Use this button to
select a station preset on the preset but- search a desired disc.
ton of the front audio system. Each push ” TRACK ” button: Use this button
of the button changes to the station with to search a desired track or push this
higher numbered preset button. button and hold it to fast forward or rever-
” TUNE ” button: Push this button se.
for manual tuning or seek tuning. (e) Some basics
 Push this button briefly. Each time you This system cannot be used if the audio
push the button, the radio will step up system is not turned on.
or down to another frequency.
You cannot select ”AM” or ”FM” mode in
 Push this button and hold it until you the rear seat if the ”FM” or ”AM” mode
hear a beep. The radio will begin seek- is used on the front seats side.
ing up or down for a station, and will The switches are installed on the left side
stop on reception. Each time you push If you select the same mode as the front of the steering wheel.
the button, the stations will be seats side, operating the controller will
”MODE” switch: Use this switch to
searched automatically one after anoth- affect the mode on the front seats side. change the mode. If a tape or compact
er. disc is not inserted, the ”TAPE” or ”CD”
CAUTION mode is skipped. When you push the
(c) When the ”TAPE” mode is selected
switch with the audio system turned off,
” PROG ” button: Push this button This system is not designed for a the audio system turns on.
to select the other side of a cassette driver. So, the driver should not use
tape. this system while driving. ” ” switches: Use this switches to ad-
” TRACK ” button: Push the left or just the volume. Push ”+” to increase the
right side to skip forward or backward to volume and ”–” to decrease the volume.
locate the song you want to hear. For The volume continues to increase or de-
details, see ”SEEK TRACK button” on crease while the switch is being pressed.
page 154.

160
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

(a) When the radio mode is selected  Push this switch briefly for automatic
” ” or ” ” switch: Push this switch for program selection. When automatically
seek tuning or to select a station. selecting a program, you can skip up
to 9 programs at a time. For details,
 To select a preset station, push the see page 154 for details.
switch briefly. Do this again to select
the next preset station. (c) When the ”CD” mode is selected

 To seek a station, push and hold the ” ” or ” ” switch: Use this switch to
switch until you hear a beep. Do this select a desired track or disc.
again to find the next station. If you  Push this switch briefly to select a de-
push the switch on either side of the sired track.
“Ɲ“ or “Ɯ” during the seek mode,  To select a desired disc, push and hold
seeking will be canceled. this switch until the desired number of
 To step up or down the frequency, the disc appears and you hear a beep.
push and hold the switch even after
you hear a beep. When you release CAUTION
from the switch, the radio will begin
seeking up or down for a station. Do Operate the switches with due care
this again to find the next station. while you are driving to avoid acci-
(b) When the ”TAPE” mode is selected dents.
” ” or ” ” switch: Push this switch to
fast forward or rewind the tape or for
automatic program selection.
 Push this switch until you hear a beep
to fast forward or rewind the tape. To
stop fast forwarding or rewinding, push
the same side on the switch until you
hear a beep.

161
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

162
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

SECTION 1− 8
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Air conditioning system
Front air conditioning system:
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Air flow selector settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Instrument panel vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Rear air conditioning system:
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Air flow selector settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

For vehicle equipped with Navigation system, please refer to the

separate “ Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

163
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Front air conditioning system—

—Controls
1. Temperature selector knob
2. ”AUTO” button
3. Temperature display
4. Fan speed display
5. Air flow display
6. ”MODE” button
7. ”A/C” button
8. Front windshield button
9. Fan speed control button
10. Air intake control button
11. ”OFF” button

164
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

”AUTO” button ”MAX COLD” appears when you adjust to

For automatic operation of the air condi- maximum cooling, and ”MAX HOT” ap-
tioning, press the ”AUTO” button. An indi- pears when you adjust to maximum warm-
cator light will illuminate to show that the ing.
automatic operation mode has been se- ”OFF” button
lected. Push the button to turn off the air condi-
In the automatic operation mode, the air tioning system.
conditioning selects the most suitable fan
speed and air flow according to the tem-
perature.
You may use manual controls if you want
to select your own settings.
To turn off the automatic operation, press
the ”MODE” or fan speed control button. ”MODE” button
Fan speed control button Push the button to select the vents used
for air flow.
Push the ”Ɯ” (increase) or ”Ɲ” (decrease)
button to adjust the fan speed. In automatic operation, you do not have
to select the air flow unless you desire
In automatic operation, you do not have another air flow mode.
to adjust the fan speed unless you desire
another fan speed mode. 1. Panel—Air flows mainly from the
instrument panel vents.
Temperature selector knob
2. Bi−level—Air flows from both the floor
To increase the temperature, turn the knob
vents and the instrument panel vents.
to right side, to decrease it, turn the knob
to left side. 3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floor
vents.
It is recommended that you close the
lower vent. For details about this, see
”Instrument panel vents” described be-
low.
165
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

4. Floor/Windshield—Air flows mainly When the ”A/C” button is not pressed in,
from the floor vents and windshield pressing ”MODE” button turns off the air
vents. conditioning.
It is recommended that you close the For details about air flow selector setting,
lower vent. For details about this, see see “Air flow selector settings” described
”Instrument panel vents” described be- below.
low.
For details about air flow selector settings,
see ”Air flow selector settings” described
below.

Front windshield button

When this button is pressed, air flows
mainly from the windshield vents.
Pressing the button once again returns the
air flow mode to the last one used.
Pressing the front windshield button turns
on the defroster−linked air conditioning. At
this time, the ”A/C” button indicator comes
on when the air intake control is in recir-
culate mode regardless of whether or not
the ”A/C” button is pressed in. This is to
clean up the front view more quickly.
To turn off the air conditioning alone,
press the ”A/C” button once again.

166
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

”A/C” button
To turn on the air conditioning, press the
”A/C” button. The ”A/C” button indicator
will come on. To turn the air conditioning
off, press the button again.
If the ”A/C” button indicator flashes, there
is a problem in the air conditioning system
and the air conditioning automatically
shuts off. If this happens, take your ve-
hicle to a Toyota dealer for service.

Air intake control button

Press the button to select the air source.
An indicator light will illuminate to show
which air intake mode is being selected.
1. Recirculate—Recirculates the air inside
the vehicle.
2. Fresh—Draws outside air into the sys-
tem.

167
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Air flow selector settings

17C001a

See “Instrument panel vents” described below.

168
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Operating tips
 To cool off your Toyota after it has  If following another vehicle on a dusty Heating
been parked in the hot sun, drive with road, or driving in windy and dusty For best results, set controls to:
the windows open for a few minutes. conditions, it is recommended that the
This vents the hot air, allowing the air air intake control button be temporarily
Fan speed—”AUTO”
conditioning to cool the interior more set to RECIRCULATE, which will close
Temperature—To the desired
quickly. off the outside passage and prevent
temperature
 Make sure the air intake grilles in front outside air and dust from entering the
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
of the windshield are not blocked (by vehicle interior.
Air flow—”AUTO”
leaves or snow, for example). Lower vent—CLOSED
 On humid days, do not blow cold air Air conditioning—OFF
on the windshield. The windshield could
fog up because of the difference in air  For quick heating, select recirculated
temperature on the inside and outside air for a few minutes. To keep the
of the windshield. windows from fogging, select fresh af-
ter the vehicle interior has been war-
 Keep the area under the front seats med.
clear to allow air to circulate through-
out the vehicle.  Press the ”A/C” button on for dehumidi-
fied heating.
 On cold days, set the fan speed to
high for a minute to help clear the  Choose floor/windshield air flow to heat
intake ducts of snow or moisture. This the vehicle interior while defrosting or
can reduce the amount of fogging on defogging the windshield.
the windows.
 When driving on dusty roads, close all
windows. If dust thrown up by the ve-
hicle is still drawn into the vehicle after
closing the windows, it is recommended
that the air intake control button be set
to FRESH and the fan speed control
button to any setting except ”OFF”.

169
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Air conditioning Defogging Defrosting

For best results, set controls to: The inside of the windshield The outside of the windshield
For best results, set controls to: For best results, set controls to:
Fan speed—”AUTO”
Temperature—To the desired Temperature—Towards high Temperature—Towards high
temperature temperature to heat; temperature
Air intake—FRESH (outside air) low temperature to Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—”AUTO” cool Air flow—WINDSHIELD
Air intake—FRESH (outside air) Lower vent—CLOSED
 For quick cooling, select recirculated
Air flow—WINDSHIELD
air for a few minutes. When pressing the front windshield button,
Lower vent—CLOSED
Ventilation the air intake selects “Fresh” automatical-
For best results, set controls to: When pressing the front windshield button, ly. This is to clean up the front view more
the air intake selects “Fresh” automatical- quickly.
ly. This is to clean up the front view more Press the ”A/C” button for dehumidified
Fan speed—”AUTO”
quickly. heating or cooling. This setting clears the
Temperature—To the desired
temperature Press the ”A/C” button for dehumidified front view more quickly.
Air intake—FRESH (outside air) heating or cooling. This setting clears the  To heat the vehicle interior while de-
Air flow—”AUTO” front view more quickly. frosting the windshield, choose
Air conditioning—OFF  On humid days, do not blow cold air floor/windshield air flow.
on the windshield—the difference be-
tween the outside and inside tempera-
tures could make the fogging worse.

170
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Instrument panel vents

Center vents Lower vent

If air flow control is not satisfactory, check

the instrument panel vents. The instrument
panel vents may be opened or closed as
shown.
For removing frost or fog, it is recom-
mended that you close the lower vent
when you use the ”Floor”, the ”Floor/Wind-
shield” or the ”Windshield” mode.

Side vents

171
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Rear air conditioning system—

—Controls
1. Rear air conditioning on−off button
2. ”AUTO” button
3. Air flow selector
4. Fan speed selector
5. Temperature selector
6. ”OFF” button

172
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Rear air conditioning on−off button Temperature selector

To turn the rear air conditioning on, press Move the lever to adjust the tempera-
the ”REAR” button. To turn the rear air ture—to the right to warm, to the left to
conditioning off, press the button again. cool.
”AUTO” button ”OFF” button
For automatic operation of the rear air Push the button to turn off the rear air
conditioning, press the ”AUTO” button. An conditioning system.
indicator light will illuminate to show that
the automatic operation mode has been
selected.
In the automatic operation mode, the rear
air conditioning selects the most suitable
fan speed and air flow according to the
temperature. Air flow selector
You may use manual controls if you want Press one of the buttons to select the
to select your own settings. vents used for air flow. An indicator light
will illuminate to show which air flow
To turn off the automatic operation, press
mode is being selected.
the ”OFF” button.
In automatic operation, you do not have
Fan speed selector to select the air flow unless you desire
Press the buttons to adjust the fan speed. another air flow mode.
In automatic operation, you do not have 1. Panel—Air flows mainly from the roof
to adjust the fan speed unless you desire vents.
another fan speed mode. 2. Bi−level—Air flows from both the floor
vents and the roof vents.
3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floor
vents.
Air at higher than room temperature does
not flow from the roof vents.
173
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Air flow selector settings

Air at lower than room temperature does
not flow from the floor vents.

Warm air
Cool air
174
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

SECTION 1− 9
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Other equipment
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Cigarette lighter and ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Roll sensing of curtain shield airbag off switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Rear console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Auxiliary boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Card holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Tie−down hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Roof luggage carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Floor mat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Coat hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

175
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Clock Outside temperature display

For example, if the ”:00” button is de-
pressed when the time is between
1:01—1:29, the time will change to 1:00.
If the time is between 1:30—1:59, the
time will change to 2:00.
If the electrical power source has been
disconnected from the clock, the time dis-
play will automatically be set to 1:00 (one
o’clock).
When the instrument panel lights are
turned on, the brightness of the time in-
dication will be reduced.

The digital clock indicates the time. The outside temperature display indi-
The key must be in the ”ACC” or ”ON” cates the outside air temperature.
position. The key must be in the ”ON” position.
To reset the hour: Push the ”H” button. The display indicates between the range
To reset the minutes: Push the ”M” button. of −22°F and 122°F.
If quick adjustment to a full hour is de-
sired, push the ”:00” button.

176
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Cigarette lighter and ashtray Power outlets

ASHTRAY The power outlets are designed for
To use the ashtray, pull it out. power supply for car accessories. To
use them, open the lids as shown in
When finished with your cigarette, thor- the following illustrations.
oughly extinguish it in the ashtray to pre-
vent other cigarette butts from catching The key must be in the ”ACC” or ”ON”
fire. After using the ashtray, push it back position to be used.
in completely.
NOTICE
To remove the ashtray, press down on the
lock spring plate and pull out. z To prevent the fuse from being
blown, do not use the electricity
CAUTION over the total vehicle capacity of
12V/120W (all the outlets together).
To reduce the chance of injury in z To prevent the battery from being
CIGARETTE LIGHTER case of an accident or sudden stop discharged, do not use the power
To use the cigarette lighter, press it in. while driving, always close the ash- outlets longer than necessary when
After it finishes heating up, it automati- tray completely after use. the engine is not running.
cally pops out ready for use. z Close the power outlet lids when
If the engine is not running, the key must the power outlets are not in use.
be in the ”ACC” position to use the light- Inserting a foreign object other than
er. plug that fits the outlet, or pouring
juice or other liquid into the outlet
Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed
may cause troubles or short cir-
in.
cuits.
Use a Toyota genuine cigarette lighter or
equivalent for replacement.

177
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Roll sensing of curtain shield

airbags off switch

Instrument panel Rear console box (Vehicles with naviga-

tion system) The roll sensing of curtain shield airbags
off switch can turn off the curtain
shield airbags and front seat belt pre-
tensioners in a vehicle rollover. This
switch should only be used in a situa-
tion where the inflation is not desired
(such as extreme offroad driving).
When you push the roll sensing of curtain
shield airbags off switch for a few seconds
with the ignition switch on, the roll sens-
ing of curtain shield airbags off indicator
light comes on and the roll sensing func-
tion is turned off. When you push the
switch again, the indicator light goes off
and the roll sensing function is turned on.
Rear console box (Vehicles without navi- Luggage compartment
gation system)

178
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Rear console box

In a severe side impact, the curtain shield
airbags on impacted side will inflate even CAUTION
if the roll sensing function is turned off.
 Make sure the roll sensing of cur-
If the ignition switch is turned to ”ACC” or
tain shield airbags off indicator light
”LOCK” with the roll sensing function off
is not on.
and then the ignition switch is turned back
to ”ON”, the roll sensing function will be  When the roll sensing of curtain
back on automatically. shield airbags off switch is turned
on (and the roll sensing of curtain
For details, ”Front seat belt pretensioners” shield airbags off indicator light is
on page 53 or ”SRS side and curtain
on), the curtain shield airbags and
shield airbags with roll sensing function”
front seat belt pretensioners will
on page 64. not inflate in a vehicle rollover and
turning off the curtain shield air-
bags can reduce the occupant To use the rear console box, open as
protection which your vehicle safety shown in the illustration.
systems can provide to you in cer- 1. For upper box
tain accidents and increase the like-
lihood of death or serious injuries. 2. For lower box

179
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Glove box Garage door opener

The battery side of the hand−held trans-
mitter must be pointed away from the
Buttons
HomeLink during the programming pro-
Indicator cess.
light
For Canadian users, follow the procedure
in “Programming an entrance gate/Pro-
gramming all devices in the Canadian
market”.
1. Decide which of 3 HomeLink buttons
you want to program. Push and hold
down one of the buttons until the indi-
cator corresponding to the selected
channel begins to flash.
The garage door opener (HomeLink
To use the glove box, do this. 2. Place your hand−held garage transmit-
Universal Transceiver) is manufactured un-
ter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) away from
To open: Pull the lever. der license from HomeLink and can be
the surface of the HomeLink.
With the instrument panel lights on, the programmed to operate garage doors,
glove box light will come on when the gates, entry doors, door locks, home light- Keep the indicator light on the
ing systems, and security systems, etc. HomeLink in view while programming.
glove box is open.
To lock: Insert the master key and turn it (a) Programming the HomeLink 3. Simultaneously press and hold the
hand−held garage transmitter button
clockwise. The HomeLink in your vehicle has 3
along with the selected HomeLink but-
buttons and you can store one program
ton.
CAUTION for each button.
4. When the indicator light on the Home-
To ensure correct programming into the
To reduce the chance of injury in Link changes from a slow to a rapid
HomeLink, install a new battery in the
case of an accident or a sudden stop, flash after 20 seconds, you can release
hand−held transmitter prior to program-
always keep the glove box door both buttons.
ming.
closed while driving.

180
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

5. Test the operation of the HomeLink by 1. Locate the “training” button on the ceil- Programming an entrance gate/Program-
pressing the newly programmed button. ing mounted garage door opener motor. ming all devices in the Canadian market
If programming a garage door opener, The exact location and color of the 1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLink but-
check to see if the garage door opens button may vary by brand of garage tons you want to program.
and closes. door opener. Refer to the owner’s
guide supplied by the garage door 2. Place your hand−held gate/device
If the garage door does not operate, transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.)
identify if your garage transmitter is of opener manufacturer for the location of
this “training” button. away from the surface of the Home-
the “Rolling Code” type. Press and hold Link.
the programmed HomeLink button. 2. Press the “training” button on the ceil-
The garage door has the rolling code ing mounted garage door opener motor. Keep the indicator light on the
feature if the indicator light (on the HomeLink in view while programming.
Following this step, you have 30 sec-
HomeLink) flashes rapidly and then onds in which to initiate step 3 below. 3. Press and hold the selected
remains lit after 2 seconds. If your HomeLink button.
garage transmitter is the “Rolling Code” 3. Press and release the vehicle’s pro-
type, proceed to the heading “Program- grammed HomeLink button twice. 4. Continuously press and release (cycle)
The garage door may open. If the door the hand−held gate/device transmitter
ming a rolling code system”. button every two seconds until step 5
does open, the programming process is
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each re- complete. If the door does not open, is complete.
maining HomeLink button to program press and release the button a third 5. When the indicator light on the Home-
another device. time. This third press and release will Link changes from a slow to a rapid
Programming a rolling code system complete the programming process by flash after 20 seconds, you can release
If your device is “Rolling Code” opening the garage door. both buttons.
equipped, it is necessary to follow The ceiling mounted garage door open- 6. Test the operation of the HomeLink by
steps 1 through 4 under the heading er motor should now recognize the pressing the newly programmed button.
“Programming the HomeLink” before HomeLink unit and be able activate Check to see if the gate/device oper-
proceeding with the steps listed below. the garage door up/down. ates correctly.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each re- 7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each re-
maining HomeLink button to program maining HomeLink button to program
another rolling code system. another device.

181
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Programming other devices

CAUTION FCC ID: CB2V94800
To program other devices such as home
CANADA: 1763 102 264
security systems, home door locks or
 When programming the HomeLink This device complies with FCC Rules
lighting, contact your authorized Toyota
Universal Transceiver, you may be part 15. Operation is subject to the fol-
dealer for assistance.
operating a garage door or other de- lowing two conditions: (1) This device
Reprogramming a button vice. Make sure people and objects may not cause harmful interference, and
Individual HomeLink buttons cannot be are out of the way of the garage (2) this device must accept any interfer-
erased, however, to reprogram a single door or other device to prevent po- ence that may be received, including
button, follow the procedure “Programming tential harm or damage. interference that may cause undesired
the HomeLink”.  Do not use this HomeLink Universal operation.
(b) Operating the HomeLink Transceiver with any garage door WARNING: This transmitter has been
opener that lacks the safety stop and
To operate the HomeLink, press the ap- tested and complies with FCC and
reverse feature as required by federal
propriate HomeLink button to activate the DOC/MDC rules. Changes or modifi-
safety standards. (This includes any
programmed device. The HomeLink indi- garage door opener model manufac-
cations not expressly approved by the
cator light should come on. The Home- party responsible for compliance
tured before April 1, 1982.) A garage
Link continues to send the signal for up could void the user’s authority to op-
door opener which cannot detect an erate the device.
to 20 seconds as long as the button is
object (signaling the door to stop
pressed.
and reverse), does not meet current
(c) Erasing the entire HomeLink federal safety standards. Using a ga-
memory (all three programs) rage door opener without these fea-
To erase all previously programmed codes tures increases risk of serious injury
at one time, press and hold down the 2 or death.
outside buttons for 20 seconds until the
indicator light flashes.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase
the programs stored in the HomeLink
memory.

182
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Auxiliary boxes—
To use the auxiliary boxes, open the
lids as shown in the following illustra-
tions.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the auxiliary box closed
while driving.

NOTICE
Auxiliary boxes on the ceiling—In hot Type A (luggage compartment) Type C (luggage compartment)
weather, inside of the vehicle ceiling
becomes very hot. Do not leave any-
thing flammable or deformable such
as a lighter, the glasses, etc. inside.

Type B (luggage compartment) Type D (luggage compartment)

183
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—First−aid kit holder

Types A and B auxiliary boxes are
equipped with a strap or band to hold
the first−aid kit.
Although the first−aid kit itself is not in-
cluded as an original equipment, this aux-
iliary box can be used to store the first−
aid kit.
Type A—
Hold the first−aid kit with a strap.
1. To loosen: Pull the buckle forward.
2. To tighten: Pull on the belt.
Type B—
Hold the first−aid kit with a band.
Type E (rear console) Type A auxiliary box
Make sure the first−aid kit is securely
held.

Type B auxiliary box

184
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Warning reflector holder Cup holders

Types C and D auxiliary boxes are The cup holder is designed for holding
equipped with a straps or band to hold cups or drink−cans securely. To use
the warning reflector. them, observe the following illustra-
Although the warning reflector itself is not tions.
included as an original equipment, this
auxiliary box can be used to store the CAUTION
warning reflector.
 Do not place anything else other
Type C—
than cups or drink−cans in the cup
Hold the warning reflector kit with the holder, as such items may be
straps. thrown about in the compartment
1. To loosen: Pull the buckle forward.
and possibly injure people in the
2. To tighten: Pull on the belt. vehicle during a sudden braking or
Type D— an accident.
Type C auxiliary box
Hold the warning reflector kit with a band.
 To reduce the chance of injury in
Make sure the warning reflector is secure- case of an accident or a sudden
ly held. stop while driving, keep the cup
holder closed when it is not in use.

Type D auxiliary box

185
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

19C008

For front seats For front seat For second seats

The cup holder can be adjusted to the To use a cup holder in the console box.
size of cups by changing the separator 1. Open the console box lid. Pull down
position or moving the separator arms. the knob so that the cup holder swings
You can use it as an accessory box by down.
removing the separator inside. 2. While holding the console box lid with
your hand, push down the cup holder
to be secured.

NOTICE
z When you use the cup holder in the
console box, make sure it is se-
curely locked.
z Do not rest your arm on the cup
holder in the console box. For third seats (right−hand side −type a)
z Wipe up spilt drink at once.
186
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Card holder Tie−down hooks

For third seats (right−hand side −type b)

You can store a card in the slot as To secure your luggage, use the tie−
shown in the illustration. down hooks as shown above.
See ”Luggage stowage precautions” on
page 203 for precautions in loading lug-
gage.

NOTICE
Do not use the seat anchors instead
of the tie−down hooks.

For third seats (left−hand side)

187
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Roof luggage carrier

Cross Side
rails knobs

Upper
knob

Roof rails

The roof luggage carrier consists of ADJUSTING THE POSITION OF CROSS 2. Slide the cross rails to the appropri-
roof rails and sliding cross rails. RAILS: ate position for loading the luggages
1. Turn the upper and side knobs coun- and turn the side knobs clockwise to
terclockwise to loosen the cross tighten the cross rails securely.
rails. There are cross rail stoppers on the roof
rails which help you prevent the cross
rails being touched with the tilted up moon
roof.

NOTICE
Do not remove the cross rail stop-
pers, or the moon roof may be dam-
aged when it is tilted.

188
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Follow the manufacture’s instructions and

precautions when installing the attach-  If driving for a long distance, on
ments or their equivalent. rough roads, or at high speeds,
stop the vehicle now and then dur-
CAUTION ing the trip to make sure the cargo
remains in its place.
When you load cargo on the roof lug-  Do not exceed 70 kg (154 lb.) cargo
gage carrier, observe the following: weight on the roof luggage carrier.
 Place the cargo so that its weight
is distributed evenly between the
front and rear axles. NOTICE
 If loading long or wide cargo, never When loading the luggages, be careful
exceed the vehicle overall length or not to scratch the surface of the
width. (See ”Dimensions and moon roof.
3. In order to fix the cross rails to the
appropriate length, turn the upper weight” on page 294 for information
knobs clockwise after tightening all on your vehicle overall length and
of the side knobs. width.)
 Before driving, make sure the cargo
CAUTION is securely fastened on the roof
luggage carrier.
Make sure the cross rails are fixed  Loading cargo on the roof luggage
securely by pushing forward and rear- carrier will make the center of the
ward them. Failure to do so may vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high
cause an unexpected accident or se- speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns,
vere injury in the event of emergency sudden braking or abrupt maneu-
braking or a collision. vers, otherwise it may result in loss
of control or vehicle rollover due to
failure to operate this vehicle cor-
rectly.

189
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Floor mat Coat hooks

Use a floor mat of the correct size. To use the coat hook, push the hook.
CAUTION
If the floor carpet and floor mat have a
hole, then it is designed for use with a CAUTION
Make sure the floor mat is properly
locking clip. Fix the floor mat with locking
placed on the floor carpet. If the floor Do not hook a hanger, heavy or sharp
clip into the hole in the floor carpet. mat slips and interferes with the pointed object on the coat hook. If
movement of the pedals during driv- the curtain shield airbags inflate,
ing, it may cause an accident. those items will be hurled away with
great force or the curtain shield air-
bags may not active correctly. When
you hang clothes, hang them on the
coat hook directly.

190
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

SECTION 2
INFORMATION BEFORE DRIVING
YOUR TOYOTA
Off−road vehicle precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Break−in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Fuel pump shut off system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Operation in foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Three−way catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Engine exhaust cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Facts about engine oil consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Iridium−tipped spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Brake pad wear limit indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Luggage stowage precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Rear step bumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Limited−slip differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Your Toyota’s identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Theft prevention labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Suspension and chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

191
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Off−road vehicle precautions

This vehicle belongs to the utility ve-
hicle class, which has higher ground CAUTION
clearance and narrower tread in relation
to the height of its center of gravity to Always observe the following precau-
make it capable of performing in a wide tions to minimize the risk of serious
variety of off−road applications. Specif- personal injury or damage to your ve-
ic design characteristics give it a high- hicle:
er center of gravity than ordinary pas-  In a rollover crash, an unbelted per-
senger cars. This vehicle design son is significantly more likely to
feature causes this type of vehicle to die than a person wearing a seat
be more likely to rollover. And, utility belt. Therefore, the driver and all
vehicles have a significantly higher rol- passengers should fasten their seat
lover rate than other types of vehicles. belts whenever the vehicle is mov-
An advantage of the higher ground ing.
clearance is a better view of the road
allowing you to anticipate problems. It
 Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu-
vers, if at all possible. Failure to
is not designed for cornering at the
operate this vehicle correctly may
same speeds as ordinary passenger
result in loss of control or vehicle
cars any more than low−slung sports
rollover causing death or serious
cars designed to perform satisfactorily
injury.
under off−road conditions. Therefore,
sharp turns at excessive speeds may  Loading cargo on the roof luggage
cause rollover. carrier will make the center of the
vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high
speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns,
sudden braking or abrupt maneu-
vers, otherwise it may result in loss
of control or vehicle rollover due to
failure to operate this vehicle cor-
rectly.

192
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Break−in period Fuel

Drive gently and avoid high speeds. FUEL TYPE
 Always slow down in gusty cross-
Your vehicle does not need an elaborate Your new vehicle must use only un-
winds. Because of its profile and
break−in. But following a few simple tips leaded gasoline.
higher center of gravity, your ve-
hicle is more sensitive to side for the first 1600 km (1000 miles) can add To help prevent gas station mix−ups, your
to the future economy and long life of Toyota has a smaller fuel tank opening.
winds than an ordinary passenger
your vehicle: The special nozzle on pumps with un-
car. Slowing down will allow you
to have better control.  Avoid full−throttle acceleration when leaded fuel will fit it, but the larger stan-
starting and driving. dard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas will
 When driving off−road or in rugged
terrain, do not drive at excessive  Avoid racing the engine. not.
speeds, jump, make sharp turns,  Try to avoid hard stops during the first At a minimum, the gasoline you use
strike objects, etc. This may cause 300 km (200 miles). should meet the specifications of ASTM
loss of control or vehicle rollover D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5−M93
causing death or serious injury.  Do not drive for a long time at any in Canada.
You are also risking expensive dam- single speed, either fast or slow.
age to your vehicle’s suspension  Do not tow a trailer during the first 800 NOTICE
and chassis. km (500 miles).
Do not use leaded gasoline. Use of
 Do not drive horizontally across leaded gasoline will cause the three−
steep slopes. Driving straight up way catalytic converter to lose its ef-
or straight down is preferred. Your fectiveness, the emission control sys-
vehicle (or any similar off−road ve- tem to function improperly, and dam-
hicle) can tip over sideways much age to the engine. Also, this can in-
more easily than forward or back- crease maintenance costs.
ward.

193
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

OCTANE RATING GASOLINE CONTAINING DETERGENT Toyota recommends the use of cleaner
Select Octane Rating 87 (Research Oc- ADDITIVES burning gasoline and appropriately blended
tane Number 91) or higher. For im- Toyota recommends the use of gasoline reformulated gasoline. These types of gas-
proved vehicle performance, the use of that contains detergent additives to oline provide excellent vehicle perfor-
premium unleaded gasoline with an Oc- avoid build−up of engine deposits. mance, reduce vehicle emissions, and im-
tane Rating of 91 (Research Octane prove air quality.
However, all gasoline sold in the U.S.
Number 96) or higher is recommended. contains detergent additives to keep clean OXYGENATES IN GASOLINE
Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane and/or clean intake systems. Toyota allows the use of oxygenate
rating or research octane number lower QUALITY GASOLINE blended gasoline where the oxygenate
than stated above will cause persistent content is up to 10% ethanol or 15%
heavy knocking. If it is severe, this will Automotive manufacturers in the U.S., MTBE. If you use gasohol in your Toyota,
lead to engine damage. Europe and Japan have developed a be sure that it has an octane rating no low-
specification for quality fuel named er than 87.
If your engine knocks... World−Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that
If you detect heavy knocking even when is expected to be applied world wide. Toyota does not recommend the use of
using the recommended fuel, or if you The WWFC consists of three categories gasoline containing methanol.
hear steady knocking while holding a that depend on required emission lev- GASOLINE CONTAINING MMT
steady speed on level roads, consult your els. In the U.S., category 3 has been Some gasoline contain an octane en-
Toyota dealer. adopted. The WWFC improves air quali- hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-
However, occasionally, you may notice ty by providing for better emissions in clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
light knocking for a short time while accel- vehicle fleets, and customer satisfaction
through better vehicle performance. Toyota does not recommend the use of
erating or driving up hills. This is normal gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel con-
and there is no need for concern. CLEANER BURNING GASOLINE taining MMT is used, your emission con-
Cleaner burning gasoline, including re- trol system may be adversely affected.
formulated gasoline that contains oxy- The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the in-
genates such as ethanol or MTBE is strument cluster may come on. If this hap-
available in many areas. pens, contact your Toyota dealer for ser-
vice.

194
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Fuel pump shut off system Operation in foreign countries

GASOLINE QUALITY The fuel pump shut off system stops sup- If you plan to drive your Toyota in
In a very few cases, you may experience plying fuel to the engine when the engine another country...
driveability problems caused by the partic- stalls or an airbag inflates upon collision. First, comply with the vehicle registration
ular gasoline that you are using. If you To restart the engine after the fuel pump laws.
continue to have unacceptable driveability, shut off system activates, turn the ignition
switch to ”ACC” or ”LOCK” once and start Second, confirm the availability of the
try changing gasoline brands. If that does correct fuel (unleaded and minimum oc-
not rectify your problem, then consult your it.
tane number).
Toyota dealer.
CAUTION
NOTICE
Inspect the ground under the vehicle
z Do not use gasohol other than before restarting the engine. If you
stated above. It will cause fuel sys- find that liquid has leaked onto the
tem damage or vehicle performance ground, it is the fuel system has
problems. been damaged and it is in need of
z If drive ability problems are occur repair. In this case, do not restart the
(poor hot starting, vaporizing, en- engine.
gine knock, etc.), discontinue the
use.
z Take care not to spill gasohol dur-
ing refueling. Gasohol may cause
paint damage.

FUEL TANK CAPACITY

96 L (25.4 gal., 21.1 Imp. gal.)

195
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Three−way catalytic converter

 Do not idle or park your vehicle z Avoid racing the engine.

over anything that might burn easi- z Do not push−start or pull−start your
ly such as grass, leaves, paper or vehicle.
rags.
z Do not turn off the ignition while
the vehicle is moving.
NOTICE z Keep your engine in good running
order. Malfunctions in the engine
A large amount of unburned gases electrical system, electric ignition
flowing into the three−way catalytic system or fuel system could cause
converter may cause it to overheat an extremely high three−way cata-
and create a fire hazard. To prevent lytic converter temperature.
this and other damage, observe the z If the engine becomes difficult to
following precautions: start or stalls frequently, take your
The three−way catalytic converter is the
emission control devices installed in z Use only unleaded gasoline. vehicle in for a check−up as soon
the exhaust system. z Do not drive with an extremely low as possible. Remember, your Toyota
fuel level; running out of fuel could dealer knows your vehicle and its
Its purpose is to reduce pollutants in the three−way catalytic converter sys-
exhaust gas. cause the engine to misfire, creat-
ing an excessive load on the three− tem best.
way catalytic converter.
CAUTION
z Do not allow the engine to run at
 Keep people and combustible mate- idle speed for more than 20 min-
rials away from the exhaust pipe utes.
while the engine is running. The
exhaust gas is very hot.

196
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Engine exhaust cautions

z To ensure that the three−way cata- CAUTION  Keep the back door and quarter
lytic converter and the entire emis- windows closed while driving. An
sion control system operate proper-  Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust. open or unsealed back door and
ly, your vehicle must receive the It contains carbon monoxide, which quarter windows may cause exhaust
periodic inspections required by the is a colorless and odorless gas. It gases to be drawn into the vehicle.
Toyota Maintenance Schedule. For can cause unconsciousness or even  To allow proper operation of your
scheduled maintenance information, death. vehicle’s ventilation system, keep
refer to the ”Scheduled Maintenance
 Make sure the exhaust system has the inlet grilles in front of the wind-
Guide” or ”Owner’s Manual Supple-
no holes or loose connections. The shield clear of snow, leaves, or oth-
ment”.
system should be checked from er obstructions.
time to time. If you hit something,  If you smell exhaust fumes in the
or notice a change in the sound of vehicle, drive with the windows
the exhaust, have the system open and the back door closed.
checked immediately. Have the cause immediately located
 Do not run the engine in a garage and corrected.
or enclosed area except for the
time needed to drive the vehicle in
or out. The exhaust gases cannot
escape, making this a particularly
dangerous situation.
 Do not remain for a long time in a
parked vehicle with the engine run-
ning. If it is unavoidable, however,
do so only in an unconfined area
and adjust the heating or cooling
system to force outside air into the
vehicle.

197
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Facts about engine oil

consumption
FUNCTIONS OF ENGINE OIL  Oil is also used to lubricate the stems As an example, if a vehicle is used for
Engine oil has the primary functions of of the intake valves. Some of this oil repeated short trips, and consumes a nor-
lubricating and cooling the inside of the is sucked into the combustion chamber mal amount of oil, the dipstick may not
engine, and plays a major role in main- together with the intake air and is show any drop in the oil level at all, even
taining the engine in proper working order. burned along with the fuel. High tem- after 1000 km (600 miles) or more. This
perature exhaust gases also burn the is because the oil is gradually becoming
ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION oil used to lubricate the exhaust valve diluted with fuel or moisture, making it
It is normal that an engine should con- stems. appear that the oil level has not changed.
sume some engine oil during normal The amount of engine oil consumed de- The diluting ingredients evaporate out
engine operation. The causes of oil pends on the viscosity of the oil, the when the vehicle is then driven at high
consumption in a normal engine are as quality of the oil and the conditions the speeds, as on an expressway, making it
follows. vehicle is driven under. appear that oil is excessively consumed
 Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston More oil is consumed by high−speed driv- after driving at high speeds.
rings and cylinders. A thin film of oil ing and frequent acceleration and decel- IMPORTANCE OF ENGINE OIL LEVEL
is left on the cylinder wall when a pis- eration. CHECK
ton moves downwards in the cylinder.
High negative pressure generated when A new engine consumes more oil, since One of the most important points in prop-
the vehicle is decelerating sucks some its pistons, piston rings and cylinder walls er vehicle maintenance is to keep the en-
of this oil into the combustion chamber. have not become conditioned. gine oil at the optimum level so that oil
This oil as well as some part of the oil When judging the amount of oil con- function will not be impaired. Therefore, it
film left on the cylinder wall is burned sumption, note that the oil may become is essential that the oil level be checked
by the high temperature combustion diluted and make it difficult to judge regularly. Toyota recommends that the oil
gases during the combustion process. the true level accurately. level be checked every time you refuel
the vehicle.

NOTICE
Failure to check the oil level regularly
could lead to serious engine trouble
due to insufficient oil.

198
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Iridium−tipped spark plugs Brake system

For detailed information on oil level check, BRAKE SYSTEM
see ”Checking the engine oil level” on This brake system has two independent
page 268. hydraulic circuits. If either circuit should
fail, the other will still work. However, the
pedal will be harder to press, and your
stopping distance will increase. Also, the
brake system warning light may come on.

CAUTION

Do not drive your vehicle with only a

single brake system. Have your
brakes fixed immediately.

Your engine is fitted with iridium−tipped

spark plugs. BRAKE BOOSTER
The brake booster uses brake fluid pres-
NOTICE surized by the pump to power−assist the
brakes. If the brake booster fails during
Use only iridium−tipped spark plugs
driving, the brake system warning light
and do not adjust gaps for your en-
comes on and buzzer sound continuously.
gine performance and smooth drivabil-
In this case, the brakes may not work
ity.
properly. If they do not work well, depress
the brake pedal firmly. If the brake system
warning light comes on, immediately stop
your vehicle and contact your Toyota deal-
er.

199
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

The brake system warning light may stay ANTI−LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM Depressing the brake pedal on slippery
on for about 60 seconds after the ignition (with “ABS” warning light) road surfaces such as on a manhole cov-
key is turned to “ON” position. It is nor- The anti−lock brake system is designed er, a steel plate at a construction site,
mal if the light turns off after a while. to automatically help prevent lock−up of joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly the wheels during a sudden braking or tends to activate the anti−lock brake sys-
may turn on the brake system warning braking on slippery road surfaces. This tem.
light and buzzer. It is normal if the light assists in providing stability and steer- You may hear a click or motor sound in
turns off and the buzzer stops sounding ing performance of the vehicle under the engine compartment for a few seconds
after a few seconds. these circumstances. when the engine is started or just after
You may hear a small sound in the engine the vehicle begins to move. This means
compartment after the engine is started or Effective way to press the ABS brake that the anti−lock brake system is in the
the brake pedal is depressed repeatedly. pedal: When the anti−lock brake system self check mode, and does not indicate a
This is a pump pulsating sound of the function is in action, you may feel the malfunction.
brake system, and it is not a malfunction. brake pedal pulsating and hear a noise. When the anti−lock brake system is ac-
In this situation, to let the anti−lock tivated, the following conditions may
CAUTION brake system work for you, just hold the occur. They do not indicate a malfunc-
brake pedal down more firmly. Do not tion of the system:
 Do not pump the brake pedal if the pump the brake in a panic stop. This
 You may hear the anti−lock brake sys-
engine stalls. Each push on the will result in reduced braking perfor-
tem operating and feel the brake pedal
pedal uses up your brake fluid mance.
pulsating and the vibrations of the body
pressure reserve. and steering wheel. You may also hear
The anti−lock brake system becomes op-
 Even if the power assist is com- erative after the vehicle has accelerated the motor sound in the engine compart-
pletely lost, the brakes will still to a speed in excess of approximately 10 ment even after the vehicle is stopped.
work. But you will have to push the km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the  At the end of the anti−lock brake sys-
pedal hard, much harder than nor- vehicle decelerates to a speed below tem activation, the brake pedal may
mal. And your braking distance will approximately 5 km/h (3 mph). move a little forward.
increase.

200
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

CAUTION Anti−lock brake system is not de-

signed to shorten the stopping dis-
Do not overestimate the anti−lock tance: Always drive at a moderate
brake system: Although the anti−lock speed and maintain a safe distance
brake system assists in providing ve- from the vehicle in front of you.
hicle control, it is still important to Compared with vehicles without an
drive with all due care and maintain anti−lock brake system, your vehicle
a moderate speed and safe distance may require a longer stopping dis-
from the vehicle in front of you, be- tance in the following cases:
cause there are limits to the vehicle  Driving on rough, gravel or snow−
stability and effectiveness of steering covered roads.
wheel operation even with the anti−
lock brake system on.  Driving with tire chains installed.
If tire grip performance exceeds its  Driving over the steps such as the “ABS” warning light
capability, or if hydroplaning occurs joints on the road. The light comes on when the ignition
during high speed driving in the rain,  Driving on roads where the road key is turned to the “ON” position. If
the anti−lock brake system does not surface is pitted or has other differ- the anti−lock brake system and the
provide vehicle control. ences in surface height. brake assist system work properly, the
light turns off after a few seconds.
Install all 4 tires of specified size at
Thereafter, if either of the systems mal-
appropriate pressure: The anti−lock
functions, the light comes on.
brake system detects vehicle speeds
using the speed sensors for respec-
tive wheels’ turning speeds. The use
of tires other than specified may fail
to detect the accurate turning speed,
resulting in a longer stopping dis-
tance.

201
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and DRUM−IN−DISC TYPE PARKING BRAKE
the brake system warning light is off), the CAUTION SYSTEM
anti−lock brake system, the brake assist Your vehicle has a drum−in−disc type
system, the vehicle skid control system If the “ABS” warning light remains on
parking brake system. This type of brake
and/or active traction control system do/ together with the brake system warn-
system needs bedding−down of the brake
does not operate, but the brake system ing light, immediately stop your ve-
shoes periodically or whenever the parking
still operates conventionally. hicle at a safe place and contact your
brake shoes and/or drums are replaced.
Toyota dealer.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and Have your Toyota dealer perform the bed-
the brake system warning light is off), the In this case, not only the anti−lock
brake system will fail but also the ding−down.
anti−lock brake system does not operate
so that the wheels could lock up during vehicle will become extremely unsta- BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM
a sudden braking or braking on slippery ble during braking. When you slam the brakes on, the
road surfaces. brake assist system judges as an emer-
If either of the following conditions oc- Either of the following conditions may gency stop and provides more powerful
curs, this indicates a malfunction some- occur, but do not indicate a malfunc- braking for a driver who cannot hold
where in the components monitored by tion. down the brake pedal firmly.
the warning light system. Contact your  The light may stay on for about 60 When you slam the brakes on, more pow-
Toyota dealer as soon as possible to seconds after the ignition key is turned erful braking will be applied. At this time,
service the vehicle. to “ON” position. It is normal if it turns you may hear a sound in the engine
 The light does not come on when the off after a while. compartment and feel the vibrations of the
brake pedal. This does not indicate a mal-
ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-  Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly
tion, or remains on. function.
may turn on the light. It is normal if it
 The light comes on while you are driv- turns off after a few seconds. The brake assist system becomes opera-
ing. tive after the vehicle has accelerated to
a speed in excess of approximately 10
A warning light turning on briefly during km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the
operation does not indicate a problem. vehicle decelerates to a speed below
approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

202
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Brake pad wear limit indicators Luggage stowage precautions

The brake assist system may not work for When stowing luggage or cargo in or on
about 60 seconds after the engine is the vehicle, observe the following:
started.  Put luggage or cargo in the luggage
For an explanation of this system’s warn- compartment when at all possible. Be
ing light, see “Service reminder indicators sure all items are secured in place.
and warning buzzers” on page 118.  Be careful to keep the vehicle bal-
anced. Locating the weight as far for-
ward as possible helps maintain the
balance.
 For better fuel economy, do not carry
unneeded weight.

CAUTION
The brake pad wear limit indicators on
your disc brakes give a warning noise  To prevent luggage or packages
when the brake pads are worn to where from sliding forward during braking,
replacement is required. do not stack anything in the lug-
If you hear a squealing or scraping noise gage compartment higher than the
while driving, have the brake pads seatbacks.
checked and replaced by your Toyota  Do not place anything on the flat-
dealer as soon as possible. Expensive ro- tened seat or it may slide forward
tor damage can result if the pads are not during braking.
replaced when necessary.

203
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Rear step bumper

 Never allow anyone to ride in the NOTICE

luggage compartment. It is not de-
Do not load the vehicle beyond the
signed for passengers. They should
vehicle capacity weight given in Sec-
ride in their seats with their seat
tion 8.
belts properly fastened. Otherwise,
they are much more likely to suffer
serious bodily injury, in the event
of sudden braking or a collision.
 Do not place anything on the lug-
gage cover. Such items may be
thrown about and possibly injure
people in the vehicle during sudden
braking or an accident. Secure all
items in a safe place. The rear step bumper is for rear end
 Do not drive with objects left on protection and easier step−up loading.
top of the instrument panel. They To get on the rear step bumper, use the
may interfere with the driver’s field shaded area between the arrows in the
of view. Or they may move during illustration.
sharp vehicle acceleration or turn-
ing, and impair the driver’s control CAUTION
of the vehicle. In an accident they
may injure the vehicle occupants.  Do not allow more than one person
to get on the rear step bumper at
a time. It is designed for only one
person.
 Never drive the vehicle with anyone
on the rear step bumper.

204
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Your Toyota’s identification—

—Vehicle identification
Limited−slip differential number
Some Toyotas are equipped with a lim-
ited−slip differential. If one of the rear
wheels begins to spin, the limited−slip dif-
ferential is designed to aid traction by
automatically transmitting driving force to
the other rear wheel. If you are not sure
whether your vehicle is equipped with one,
you can ask your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Do not start or run the engine while

your vehicle is supported by a jack.
The vehicle could be driven off the
jack and could pose a danger or re- The vehicle identification number (VIN) The vehicle identification number (VIN) is
sult in serious injury. is the legal identifier for your vehicle. also on the Certification Label.
This number is on the left top of the
instrument panel, and can be seen
NOTICE through the windshield from outside.
Use only a spare tire of the same This is the primary identification number
size, construction and load capacity for your Toyota. It is used in registering
as the original tires on your Toyota the ownership of your vehicle.
because damage to the limited−slip
differential could possibly occur with
another tire type.

205
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Engine number Theft prevention labels Suspension and chassis

Your new vehicle carries theft preven-
tion labels which are approximately 56 CAUTION
mm (2.20 in.) by 16 mm (0.63 in.).
Do not modify the suspension/chassis
The purpose of these labels is to reduce
with lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. It
the incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitat-
can cause dangerous handling charac-
ing the tracing and recovery of parts from
teristics, resulting in loss of control.
stolen vehicles. The label is designed so
that once it is applied to a surface, any
attempt to remove it will result in destroy-
ing the integrity of the label. Transferring
these labels intact from one part to anoth-
er, will be impossible.

NOTICE
The engine number is stamped on the
engine block as shown. You should not attempt to remove the
theft prevention labels as it may vio-
late certain state or federal laws.

206
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Types of tires
Determine what kind of tires your ve-
hicle is originally equipped with. CAUTION
1. Summer tires
 Do not mix summer and all season
Summer tires are high−speed capability tires on your vehicle as this can
tires best suited to highway driving under cause dangerous handling charac-
dry conditions. teristics, resulting in loss of con-
Since summer tires do not have the same trol.
traction performance as snow tires, sum-  Do not use tire other than the
mer tires are inadequate for driving on manufacturer’s designated tires, and
snow−covered or icy roads. For driving on never mix tires or wheels of the
snow−covered or icy roads, we recom- sizes different from the originally
mend using snow tires. If installing snow equipped tires and wheels.
tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
2. All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide
better traction in snow and to be adequate
for driving in most winter conditions, as
well as for use all year round.
All season tires, however, do not have
adequate traction performance compared
with snow tires in heavy or loose snow.
Also, all season tires fall short in accel-
eration and handling performance
compared with summer tires in highway
driving.

207
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

208
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

SECTION 3
STARTING AND DRIVING
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
How to start the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Tips for driving in various conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Off−road driving precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Winter driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Dinghy towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer, too . . . . . . . . . 223

209
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

How to start the engine–

Before starting the engine (a) Cranking hold function (c) Starting the engine
1. Check the area around the vehicle be- Once you turn the ignition key to “START” Before starting the engine, be sure to fol-
fore entering it. position and release it, the cranking hold low the instructions in ”(b) Before crank-
2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle, function continues to crank the engine in ing”.
head restraint height and steering “ON” position until it starts. Normal starting procedure
wheel angle. The function stops cranking the engine The multiport fuel injection system/sequen-
3. Adjust the inside and outside rear view after about 25 seconds maximum if the tial multiport fuel injection system in your
mirrors. engine has not started yet. When you engine automatically controls the proper
crank the engine again, wait a few sec- air−fuel mixture for starting. You can start
4. Lock all doors. onds and restart it. a cold or hot engine as follows:
5. Fasten seat belts. If you hold the key in “START” position, 1. With your foot off the accelerator ped-
the function will keep cranking for about al, turning the ignition key to ”START”
30 seconds maximum. position, then release it.
(b) Before cranking 2. After the engine runs for about 10 se-
1. Apply the parking brake firmly. conds, you are ready to drive.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces- If the weather is below freezing, let the
sories. engine warm up for a few minutes be-
fore driving.
3. Put the selector lever in ”P”. If you
need to restart the engine while the If the engine stalls...
vehicle is moving, put the selector le- Simply restart it, using the correct proce-
ver in ”N”. A starter safety device will dure given in normal starting.
prevent the starter from operating if the
If the engine will not start...
selector lever is in any drive position.
See ”If your vehicle will not start” on page
4. Depress the brake pedal and hold it
226.
to the floor until driving off.

210
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Tips for driving

in various conditions
 Always slow down in gusty crosswinds.
NOTICE CAUTION
This will allow you much better control.
z Do not race a cold engine.  Drive slowly onto curbs and, if pos-  Before driving off, make sure the
z If the engine becomes difficult to sible, at a right angle. Avoid driving
parking brake is fully released and
start or stalls frequently, have the onto high, sharp−edged objects and
that the parking brake reminder
engine checked immediately. other road hazards. Failure to do so
light is off.
can lead to severe tire damage such
as a tire burst.  Do not leave your vehicle unat-
Drive slowly when passing over bumps tended while the engine is running.
or travelling on a bumpy road. Other-  Do not rest your foot on the brake
wise, the impact could cause severe pedal while driving. It can cause
damage to the tires and/or wheels. dangerous overheating, needless
 When parking on a hill, turn the front wear, and poor fuel economy.
wheels until they touch the curb so  To drive down a long or steep hill,
that the vehicle will not roll. Apply the reduce your speed and downshift.
parking brake, and place the transmis- Remember, if you ride the brakes
sion in ”P”. If necessary, block the excessively, they may overheat and
wheels. not work properly.
 Washing your vehicle or driving through  Be careful when accelerating, up-
deep water may get the brakes wet. To shifting, downshifting or braking on
see whether they are wet, check that a slippery surface. Sudden accelera-
there is no traffic near you, and then tion or engine braking could cause
press the pedal lightly. If you do not the vehicle to spin or skid.
feel a normal braking force, the brakes
are probably wet. To dry them, drive
the vehicle cautiously while lightly
pressing the brake pedal with the park-
ing brake applied. If they still do not
work safely, pull to the side of the road
and call a Toyota dealer for assistance.

211
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Off−road driving precautions

When driving your vehicle off−road, please  U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of
 Do not drive in excess of the speed observe the following precautions to en- Land Management
limit. Even if the legal speed limit sure your driving enjoyment and to help
permits it, do not drive over 140 prevent the closure of areas to off−road CAUTION
km/h (85 mph) unless your vehicle vehicles.
has high−speed capability tires. Always observe the following precau-
a. Drive your vehicle only in areas where
Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) may tions to minimize the risk of serious
off−road vehicles are permitted to trav-
result in tire failure, loss of control personal injury or damage to your ve-
el.
and possible injury. Be sure to con- hicle:
sult a tire dealer to determine b. Respect private property. Get owner’s
whether the tires on your vehicle permission before entering private prop-  Drive carefully when off the road.
are high−speed capability tires or erty. Do not take unnecessary risks by
not before driving at such speeds. driving in dangerous places.
c. Do not enter areas that are closed.
 Do not continue normal driving Honor gates, barriers and signs that re-  Do not grip the steering wheel
strict travel. spokes when driving off−road. A
when the brakes are wet. If they are
bad bump could jerk the wheel and
wet, your vehicle will require a d. Stay on established roads. When injure your hands. Keep both
longer stopping distance, and it conditions are wet, driving techniques hands and especially your thumbs
may pull to one side when the should be changed or travel delayed to on the outside of the rim.
brakes are applied. Also, the park- prevent damage to roads.
ing brake will not hold the vehicle  Always check your brakes for effec-
For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and tiveness immediately after driving in
securely.
Puerto Rico: sand, mud, water or snow.
To obtain additional information pertaining
to driving your vehicle off−road, consult
the following organizations.
 State and Local Parks and Recreation
Departments
 State Motor Vehicle Bureau
 Recreational Vehicle Clubs

212
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

 After driving through tall grass, NOTICE z Always perform a maintenance in-
mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., check spection after each day of off−road
z If driving through water, such as
that there is no grass, bush, paper, driving that has taken you through
when crossing shallow streams,
rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or rough terrain, sand, mud, or water.
first check the depth of the water
trapped on the underbody. Clear For scheduled maintenance informa-
and the bottom of the river bed for
off any such matter from the under- tion, refer to the “Scheduled Main-
firmness. Drive slowly and avoid
body. If the vehicle is used with tenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual
deep water.
these materials trapped or adhering Supplement”.
to the underbody, a breakdown or z Take all necessary safety measures
fire could occur. to ensure that water damage to the
engine or other components does
 In a rollover crash, an unbelted per- not occur.
son is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a seat z Water entering the engine air intake
belt. Therefore, the driver and all will cause severe engine damage.
passengers should fasten their seat z Water can wash the grease from
belts whenever the vehicle is mov- wheel bearings, causing rusting and
ing. premature failure, and may also en-
 When driving off−road or in rugged ter the differentials, transmission
terrain, do not drive at excessive and transfer case, reducing the gear
speeds, jump, make sharp turns, oil’s lubricating qualities.
strike objects, etc. This may cause z Sand and mud that has accumulated
loss of control or vehicle rollover in brake drums and around brake
causing death or serious injury. discs may affect braking efficiency
You are also risking expensive dam- and may damage brake system com-
age to your vehicle’s suspension ponents.
and chassis.

213
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Winter driving tips

Make sure your coolant is properly pro- Make sure the engine oil viscosity is Do not use your parking brake when
tected against freezing. suitable for the cold weather. there is a possibility it could freeze.
Your coolant must contain ethylene−glycol See page 269 for recommended viscosity. When parking, put the transmission into
type coolant for a proper corrosion Leaving a heavy summer oil in your ve- ”P” and block the front wheels. Do not
protection of aluminum components. Use hicle during winter months may cause use the parking brake, or snow or water
”Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” or harder starting. If you are not sure about accumulated in and around the parking
equivalent. which oil to use, call your Toyota dealer– brake mechanism may freeze, making it
See page 270 for details about coolant he will be pleased to help. hard to release.
type selection. Keep the door locks from freezing. Keep ice and snow from accumulating
Squirt lock de−icer or glycerine into the under the fenders.
NOTICE locks to keep them from freezing. Ice and snow built up under your fenders
Do not use alcohol type antifreeze or Use a washer fluid containing an anti- can make steering difficult. During bad
plain water alone. freeze solution. winter driving, stop and check under the
fenders occasionally.
This product is available at your Toyota
When it is extremely cold, we recommend dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow Depending on where you are driving,
a 60% solution for your Toyota, to provide the manufacturer’s directions for how we recommend you carry some emer-
protection down to about −50°C (−58°F). much to mix with water. gency equipment.
Do not use more than 70% solution for Some of the things you might put in the
better coolant performance. NOTICE vehicle are tire chains, window scraper,
Check the condition of the battery and bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,
Do not use engine antifreeze or any
cables. jumper cables, etc.
other substitute as washer fluid be-
Cold temperatures reduce the capacity of cause it may damage your vehicle’s
any battery, so it must be in top shape paint.
to provide enough power for winter start-
ing. It tells you how to visually inspect the
battery on page 282. Your Toyota dealer
and most service stations will be pleased
to check the level of charge.

214
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Dinghy towing Trailer towing

Your vehicle is designed primarily as a
passenger−and−load−carrying vehicle. Tow- CAUTION
ing a trailer will have an adverse effect on
handling, performance, braking, durability  The maximum gross trailer weight
and driving economy (fuel consumption, (trailer weight plus cargo weight)
etc.). Your safety and satisfaction depend must never exceed 2948 kg
on the proper use of correct equipment (6500 lb.). If towing a trailer and
and cautious driving habits. For your safe- cargo weighing over 907 kg
ty and the safety of others, you must not (2000 lb.), it is necessary to use a
overload your vehicle or trailer. Ask your sway control device with sufficient
local Toyota dealer for further details be- capacity. The combination of the
fore towing. gross trailer weight added to the
total weight of the vehicle, occu-
WEIGHT LIMITS
pants and vehicle cargo must never
Before towing, make sure the total trail- exceed a total of 5625 kg
Your vehicle is not designed to be
dinghy towed (with four wheels on the er weight, gross combination weight, (12400 lb.). Exceeding the maximum
gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight weight of the trailer, the vehicle, or
ground) behind a motorhome.
and trailer tongue load are all within the vehicle and trailer combination,
NOTICE the limits. can cause an accident resulting in
The total trailer weight and tongue load serious personal injuries.
Do not tow your vehicle with four can be measured with platform scales
wheels on the ground. This may found at a highway weighing station, build-
cause serious damage to your vehicle. ing supply company, trucking company,
junk yard, etc.

215
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

 Trailer hitch assemblies have differ-  The load on either the front or rear
ent weight capacities established by axle resulting from distribution of
the hitch manufacturer. Even though the gross vehicle weight on both
the vehicle may be physically capa- axles must not exceed the Gross
ble of towing a higher weight, the Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) listed
operator must determine the maxi- on the Certification Label.
mum weight rating of the particular
hitch assembly and never exceed
the maximum weight rating speci-
fied for the trailer−hitch. Exceeding
the maximum weight rating set by
the trailer hitch manufacturer can
cause an accident resulting in seri-
ous personal injuries.
 The gross vehicle weight must not
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) indicated on the
Certification Label. The gross ve-
hicle weight is the sum of weights
of the unloaded vehicle, driver, pas-
sengers, luggage, hitch and trailer
tongue load. It also includes the
weight of any special equipment
installed on your vehicle.

216
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

HITCHES
Total trailer weight Tongue load Never load the trailer with more
weight in the back than in the
 If you wish to install a trailer hitch, you
should consult with your Toyota dealer.
front. About 60% of the trailer load
should be in the front half of the  Use only a hitch recommended by the
trailer and the remaining 40% in the hitch manufacturer and the one which
rear. conforms to the total trailer weight
requirement.
 The hitch must be bolted securely to
the vehicle frame and installed accord-
Tongue load
100 = 9 to 11% (∗ 1) ing to the hitch manufacturer’s instruc-
Total trailer weight or 15% (∗ 2) tions.
 The hitch ball and king pin should have
a light coat of grease.
 The trailer cargo load should be  Toyota recommends removing the trail-
distributed so that the tongue load er hitch whenever you are not towing
is 9 to 11% for weight carrying a trailer to reduce the possibility of
hitch (∗1) or 15% for weight distrib- additional damage caused by the hitch
uting hitch (∗2) of the total trailer if your vehicle is struck from behind.
weight, not exceeding the maximum After removing the hitch, seal any
load of the following mounting holes in the vehicle body to
Weight carrying hitch prevent entry of pollutants such as ex-
295 kg (650 lb.) haust fumes, dirt, water, etc.
Weight distributing hitch
442 kg (975 lb.)

217
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Trailer Class Typical Trailer Ball Size

NOTICE
III 2 5/16 in.
Do not use axle−mounted hitches as II 2 in.
they can cause damage to the axle I 1 7/8 in.
housing, wheel bearings, wheels or 2. Select the appropriate trailer ball to
tires. Also, never install a hitch which match or exceed the gross trailer
may interfere with the normal function weight rating of the trailer. The trailer
of an Energy Absorbing Bumper, if so ball load rating should be printed on
equipped. the top of the ball.
3. When mounted in the ball mount, the
threaded ball shank must protrude be-
yond the bottom of the lock washer
and nut at least 2 threads. The trailer
1 Trailer ball load rating ball shank must be matched to the ball
2 Ball diameter mount hole diameter size.
3 Shank length
4 Shank diameter
TRAILER BALL
Follow these easy steps to properly deter-
mine the correct trailer ball for your ap-
plication:
1. Determine the correct trailer ball size
for the trailer coupler. Most couplers
are stamped with the required trailer
ball size. The sizes you will most likely
find stamped on the coupler are:

218
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

MATCHING TRAILER BALL HEIGHT TO

TRAILER COUPLER HEIGHT CAUTION
No matter which class of tow hitch ap-
 If the total trailer weight exceeds
plies, for a safe trailer hookup, the trailer
453 kg (1000 lb.), trailer brakes are
ball setup on must be the proper height
required.
for the coupler on the trailer.
BRAKES AND SAFETY CHAINS
 Never tap into your vehicle’s hy-
draulic system as it would lower its
 Toyota recommends trailers with braking effectiveness.
brakes that conform to any applica-
ble federal and state/provincial regu-
 Never tow a trailer without using a
safety chain securely attached to
lations.
both the trailer and the vehicle. If
 A safety chain must always be used damage occurs to the coupling unit
between the towing vehicle and the or hitch ball, there is danger of the
trailer. Leave sufficient slack in the trailer wandering over into another
chain for turns. The chain should lane.
cross under the trailer tongue to
prevent the tongue from dropping to
the ground in case it becomes dam-
aged or separated. For correct safety
chain procedures, follow the hitch or
trailer manufacturer’s recommenda-
tions.

1 Coupler
2 Trailer ball

219
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

TIRES BREAK−IN SCHEDULE

 Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are  Toyota recommends that you do not
properly inflated. Adjust the tire pres- tow a trailer with a new vehicle or a
sure indicated below: vehicle with any new power train com-
Tire pressure, kPa (psi) ponent (engine, transmission, differen-
Front 220 (32) tial, wheel bearing, etc.) for the first
Rear 240 (35) 800 km (500 miles) of driving.
See Section 7−2 and Section 8 for in- MAINTENANCE
structions.  If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will
 The trailer tires should be inflated to require more frequent maintenance due
the pressure recommended by the trail- to the additional load. For this
er manufacturer in respect to the total information, please refer to the
trailer weight. scheduled maintenance information in
TRAILER LIGHTS the ”Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or
 Your vehicle is equipped with a wire ”Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
harness stored in the rear end under  Retighten all fixing bolts of the towing
body. Your vehicle is fitted with a sock- ball and bracket after approximately
et for trailer lights under the rear 1000 km (600 miles) of trailer driving.
bumper. Use either of them to connect PRE−TOWING SAFETY CHECK
and operate the trailer lights. However,
the trailer lights must comply with fed-
 Check that your vehicle remains level
when a loaded or unloaded trailer is
eral, state/provincial and local regula-
tions. See your local recreational ve- hitched. Do not drive if the vehicle has
an abnormal nose−up or nose−down
hicle dealer or rental agency for the
condition, and check for improper
correct type of wiring and relays for
your trailer. Check for correct operation tongue load, overload, worn suspension
or other possible causes.
of the turn signals and stop lights each
time you hitch up. Direct splicing may  Make sure the trailer cargo is securely
damage your vehicle’s electrical system loaded so that it cannot shift.
and cause a malfunction of your lights.

220
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

 Check that your rear view mirrors con-  Avoid jerky starts or sudden accelera-  Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-
form to any applicable federal, state/ tion. versely affect handling of your vehicle
provincial or local regulations. If not,  Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns. and trailer, causing sway. Pay attention
install the rear view mirrors required The trailer could hit your vehicle in a to the rear from time to time to pre-
for towing purpose. tight turn. Slow down before making a pare yourself for being passed by large
TRAILER TOWING TIPS turn to avoid the necessity of sudden trucks or buses, which may cause your
braking. vehicle and trailer to sway. If swaying
When towing a trailer, your vehicle will happens, firmly grip the steering wheel
handle differently than when not tow-  Remember that when making a turn, and reduce speed immediately but
ing. The three main causes of vehicle− the trailer wheels will be closer than gradually. Never increase speed. Steer
trailer accidents are driver error, exces- the vehicle wheels to the inside of the straight ahead. If you make no extreme
sive speed and improper trailer loading. turn. Therefore, compensate for this by correction with the steering or brakes,
Keep these in mind when towing: making a larger than normal turning the vehicle and trailer will stabilize it-
 Before starting out, check operation of radius with your vehicle. self.
the lights and all vehicle−trailer connec-  Backing with a trailer is difficult and  Be careful when passing other ve-
tions. After driving a short distance, requires practice. Grip the bottom of hicles. Passing requires considerable
stop and recheck the lights and con- the steering wheel and move your hand distance. After passing a vehicle, do
nections. Before actually towing a trail- to the left to move the trailer to the not forget the length of your trailer and
er, practice turning, stopping and back- left. Move your hand to the right to be sure you have plenty of room be-
ing with a trailer in an area away from move the trailer to the right. (This pro- fore changing lanes.
traffic until you learn the feel. cedure is generally opposite to that
 In order to maintain engine braking and
 Because stopping distance may be in- when backing without a trailer). Also,
electrical charging performance, do not
creased, vehicle−to−vehicle distance just turn the steering wheel a little at
a time, avoiding sharp or prolonged use the overdrive. Transmission must
should be increased when towing a be in the ”4” position.
trailer. For each 16 km/h (10 mph) of turning. Have someone guide you when
speed, allow at least one vehicle and backing to reduce the risk of an acci-
trailer length between you and the ve- dent.
hicle ahead. Avoid sudden braking as
you may skid, resulting in jackknifing
and loss of control. This is especially
true on wet or slippery surfaces.

221
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

 Because of the added load of the trail- When restarting out after parking on a
er, your vehicle’s engine may overheat slope: CAUTION
on hot days (at temperatures over 1. With the transmission in ”P” posi-
30°C [85°F]) when going up a long or  Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) or
tion, start the engine. Be sure to
steep grade with a trailer. If the engine the posted towing speed limit,
keep the brake pedal depressed.
coolant temperature gauge indicates whichever is lower. Because insta-
overheating, immediately turn off the air 2. Shift into the ”3”, ”2”, ”L” or ”R” bility (swaying) of a towing vehicle−
conditioning (if in use), pull off the road position. trailer combination usually in-
and stop in a safe spot. Refer to ”If 3. Release the parking brake and creases as the speed increases, ex-
your vehicle overheats” on page 230. brake pedal and slowly pull or back ceeding 72 km/h (45 mph) may
cause loss of control.
 Always place wheel blocks under both away from the wheel blocks. Stop
the vehicle and trailer wheels when and apply your brakes.  Slow down and downshift before
parking. Apply the parking brake firmly. 4. Have someone retrieve the blocks. descending steep or long downhill
Put the transmission in ”P”. Avoid park- grades. Do not make sudden down-
ing on a slope with a trailer, but if it shifts.
cannot be avoided, do so only after  Avoid holding the brake pedal down
performing the following: too long or too frequently. This
1. Apply the brakes and keep them could cause the brakes to overheat
applied. and result in reduced braking effi-
ciency.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks
under both the vehicle and trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel blocks are in place,
release your brakes slowly until the
blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the parking brake firmly.
5. Shift into ”P” and turn off the en-
gine.

222
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

How to save fuel and make

your vehicle last longer, too
Improving fuel economy is easy–just take  Avoid engine over-revving. Use a  Keep the front wheels in proper
it easy. It will help make your vehicle last gear position suitable for the road on alignment. Avoid hitting the curb and
longer, too. Here are some specific tips which you are travelling. slow down on rough roads. Improper
on how to save money on both fuel and  Avoid continuous speeding up and alignment not only causes faster tire
repairs: slowing down. Stop−and−go driving wear but also puts an extra load on
 Keep your tires inflated at the cor- wastes fuel. the engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.
rect pressure. Underinflation causes  Avoid unnecessary stopping and  Keep the bottom of your vehicle free
tire wear and wastes fuel. See Section braking. Maintain a steady pace. Try from mud, etc. This not only lessens
7−2 for instructions. to time the traffic signals so you only weight but also helps prevent corro-
 Do not carry unneeded weight in need to stop as little as possible or sion.
your vehicle. Excess weight puts a take advantage of through streets to  Keep your vehicle tuned−up and in
heavier load on the engine, causing avoid traffic lights. Keep a proper dis- top shape. A dirty air cleaner, improp-
greater fuel consumption. tance from other vehicles to avoid sud- er valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oil
 Avoid lengthy warm−up idling. Once den braking. This will also reduce wear and grease, brakes not adjusted, etc.
the engine is running smoothly, begin on your brakes. all lower engine performance and con-
driving—but gently. Remember, howev-  Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jams tribute to poor fuel economy. For longer
er, that on cold winter days this may whenever possible. life of all parts and lower operating
costs, keep all maintenance work on
take a little longer.  Do not rest your foot on the brake schedule, and if you often drive under
 Accelerate slowly and smoothly. pedal. This causes premature wear, severe conditions, see that your vehicle
Avoid jackrabbit starts. overheating and poor fuel economy. receives more frequent maintenance.
 Avoid long engine idling. If you have  Maintain a moderate speed on high- (For scheduled maintenance informa-
a long wait and you are not in traffic, ways. The faster you drive, the greater tion, please refer to the ”Scheduled
it is better to turn off the engine and the fuel consumption. By reducing your Maintenance Guide” or ”Owner’s Manu-
start again later. speed, you will cut down on fuel con- al Supplement”.)
sumption.

223
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

CAUTION

Never turn off the engine to coast

down hills. Your power steering and
brake booster will not function with-
out the engine running. Also, the
emission control system operates
properly only when the engine is run-
ning.

224
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

SECTION 4
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
If your vehicle will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
If your engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
If you cannot increase the engine speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
If your vehicle becomes stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
If your vehicle needs to be towed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever . . . . . . . . 245
If you lose your keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

225
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

If your vehicle will not start—

(a) Simple checks
Before making these checks, make sure If the light is O.K., but the engine still will If the engine turns over at its normal
you have followed the correct starting not start, it needs adjustment or repair. speed but will not start—
procedure given in ”How to start the Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair 1. The engine may be flooded because of
engine” on page 210 and that you have shop. repeated cranking. See ”(b) Starting a
sufficient fuel. Also check whether the flooded engine” for further instructions.
other keys will start the engine. If they NOTICE
work, your key may be broken. Have the 2. If the engine still will not start, it needs
Do not pull− or push−start the ve- adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota
key checked at your Toyota dealer. If
hicle. It may damage the vehicle or dealer or qualified repair shop.
none of your keys work, there may be a
cause a collision when the engine
malfunction in the immobiliser system. Call
starts. Also the three−way catalytic
your Toyota dealer. (See ”Keys” on page
converter may overheat and become a
10.)
fire hazard.
If the engine is not turning over or is
turning over too slowly—
1. Check that the battery terminals are
tight and clean.
2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switch
on the interior light.
3. If the light is out, dim or goes out
when the starter is cranked, the battery
is discharged. You may try jump start-
ing. See ”(c) Jump starting” for further
instructions.

226
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

(b) Starting a flooded engine (c) Jump starting

If the engine will not start, your engine To avoid serious personal injury and
may be flooded because of repeated damage to your vehicle which might re-  The gas normally produced by a
cranking. sult from battery explosion, acid burns, battery will explode if a flame or
electrical burns, or damaged electronic spark is brought near. Use only
If this happens, turn the ignition key to standardized jumper cables and do
“START” with the accelerator pedal fully components, these instructions must be
followed precisely. not smoke or light a match while
depressed, and hold the key at this posi-
jump starting.
tion for about 30 seconds. Then the If you are unsure about how to follow this
cranking hold function stops cranking au- procedure, we strongly recommend that Warning: Battery posts, terminals and
tomatically, and you can try starting the you seek the help of a competent me- related accessories contain lead and
engine with your foot off the accelerator chanic or towing service. lead compounds, chemicals know to
pedal. the State of California to cause can-
CAUTION cer and reproductive harm. Wash
If the engine does not start, wait a few hands after handling.
minutes and try again.
 Batteries contain sulfuric acid
If the engine still will not start, it needs
which is poisonous and corrosive.
adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealer Wear protective safety glasses when NOTICE
or qualified repair shop for assistance. jump starting, and avoid spilling The battery used for boosting must
acid on your skin, clothing, or ve- be 12 V. Do not jump start unless you
hicle. are sure that the booster battery is
 If you should accidentally get acid correct.
on yourself or in your eyes, remove
any contaminated clothing and flush
the affected area with water im-
mediately. Then get immediate medi-
cal attention. If possible, continue
to apply water with a sponge or
cloth while en route to the medical
office.

227
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE

1. If the booster battery is installed in Discharged battery Jumper cable
another vehicle, make sure the vehicles
are not touching. Turn off all unneces-
sary lights and accessories.
Booster
2. If required, remove all the vent plugs battery
from the booster and discharged batter-
ies. Lay a cloth over the open vents
on the batteries. (This helps reduce the Positive
terminal
explosion hazard, personal injuries and (“+” mark) Discharged battery
Booster
burns.) Jumper Negative battery
Positive terminal terminal (“−” mark)
3. If the engine in the vehicle with the cable (“+” mark)
booster battery is not running, start it
and let it run for a few minutes. During 4. Make the cable connections in the or- c. Connect the clamp of the negative
jump starting, run the engine at about der a, b, c, d. (black) jumper cable to the negative (−)
2000 rpm with the accelerator pedal terminal on the booster battery.
a. Connect the clamp of the positive
lightly depressed.
(red) jumper cable to the positive ( ) d. Connect the clamp at the other end
terminal on the discharged battery. of the negative (black) jumper cable to
b. Connect the clamp at the other end a solid, stationary, unpainted, metallic
of the positive (red) jumper cable to point of the vehicle with the discharged
the positive ( ) terminal on the booster battery.
battery. The recommended connecting point is
shown in the following illustration:

228
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

If your engine stalls while

driving
5. Start your engine in the normal way. If your engine stalls while driving...
After starting, run it at about 2000 rpm 1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping
for several minutes with the accelerator a straight line. Move cautiously off the
pedal lightly depressed. road to a safe place.
6. Carefully disconnect the cables in the 2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
exact reverse order: the negative cable
and then the positive cable. 3. Try starting the engine again.
7. Carefully dispose of the battery cover If the engine will not start, see ”If your
cloths—they may now contain sulfuric vehicle will not start” on page 226.
acid.
CAUTION
8. If removed, replace all the battery vent
plugs. If the engine is not running, the pow-
Connecting point If the cause of your battery discharging is er assist for the brakes and steering
not apparent (for example, lights left on), will not work so steering and braking
Do not connect the cable to or near
you should have it checked at your Toyota will be much harder than usual.
any part that moves when the engine
dealer.
is cranked.

CAUTION

When making the connections, to

avoid serious injury, do not lean over
the battery or accidentally let the
jumper cables or clamps touch any-
thing except the correct battery termi-
nals or the ground.

229
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

If you cannot increase the en-

gine speed If your vehicle overheats
If the engine speed does not increase If your engine coolant temperature 3. Visually check to see if the engine
when the accelerator pedal is de- gauge indicates overheating, if you ex- drive belt (fan belt) is broken or loose.
pressed, the electronic throttle control perience a loss of power, or if you hear Look for obvious coolant leaks from the
system may be faulty. Move the vehicle a loud knocking or pinging noise, the radiator, hoses, and under the vehicle.
to a safe place by means of creeping engine has probably overheated. You However, note that water draining from
and call a Toyota dealer for assistance: should follow this procedure... the air conditioning is normal if it has
1. Depress the brake pedal and shift to 1. Pull safely off the road, stop the ve- been used.
the ”D” position. hicle and turn on your emergency
flashers. Put the transmission in ”P” CAUTION
2. Gradually release the brake pedal, and
the vehicle starts to move by creeping. and apply the parking brake. Turn off
the air conditioning if it is being used. When the engine is running, keep
After arriving at a safe place, stop the
hands and clothing away from the
vehicle and call a Toyota dealer for 2. If coolant or steam is boiling out of the moving fan and engine drive belts.
assistance. radiator or reservoir, stop the engine.
Wait until the steam subsides before
CAUTION opening the hood. If there is no coolant 4. If the engine drive belt is broken or the
boiling over or steam, leave the engine coolant is leaking, stop the engine im-
 The above method of moving the running. mediately. Call a Toyota dealer for as-
vehicle is for emergency. Use it sistance.
only for moving minimum distances CAUTION 5. If the engine drive belt is O.K. and
to a safe place. there are no obvious leaks, you may
 Be especially careful to prevent er- To help avoid personal injury, keep help the engine cool down more quickly
roneous pedal operation. the hood closed until there is no by running it at about 1500 rpm for a
steam. Escaping steam or coolant is few minutes with the accelerator pedal
a sign of very high pressure. lightly depressed.
6. Check the coolant reservoir. If it is dry,
add coolant to the reservoir while the
engine is running. Fill it about half full.

230
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

If you have a flat tire—

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping
CAUTION a straight line. Move cautiously off the  Stop the vehicle on a level firm
road to a safe place well away from ground, firmly set the parking brake
Do not attempt to remove the radiator the traffic. Avoid stopping on the center and put the transmission in reverse.
cap when the engine and radiator are divider of a highway. Park on a level Block the wheel diagonally opposite
hot. Serious injury could result from spot with firm ground. to the one being changed if neces-
scalding hot fluid and steam blown sary.
2. Stop the engine and turn on your
out under pressure.
emergency flashers.  Make sure to set the jack properly
in the jack point. Raising the ve-
3. Firmly set the parking brake and put hicle with jack improperly posi-
7. After the engine coolant temperature
the transmission in ”P”. tioned will damage the vehicle or
has cooled to normal, again check the
coolant level in the reservoir. If neces- 4. Have everyone get out of the vehicle may allow the vehicle to fall off the
sary, bring it up to half full again. Seri- on the side away from traffic. jack and cause personal injury.
ous coolant loss indicates a leak in the 5. Read the following instructions thor-  Never get under the vehicle when
system. You should have it checked as oughly. the vehicle is supported by the jack
soon as possible at your Toyota dealer. alone.
CAUTION  Use the jack only for lifting your
vehicle during wheel changing.
When jacking, be sure to observe the
following to reduce the possibility of  Do not raise the vehicle with some-
personal injury: one in the vehicle.
 Follow jacking instructions.  When raising the vehicle, do not
place any objects on top of or un-
 Do not put any part of your body derneath the jack.
under the vehicle supported by the
jack. Otherwise, personal injury may  Raise the vehicle only high enough
occur. to remove and change the tire.
 Do not start or run the engine while
your vehicle is supported by the
jack.

231
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Required tools and spare

tire
NOTICE
Do not continue driving with a de-
flated tire. Driving even a short dis-
tance can damage a tire and wheel
beyond repair.

1. Get the required tools and spare Turn the jack joint by hand.
tire. To remove: Turn the joint in direction 1
1 Tool bag until the jack is free.
2 Jack To store: Turn the joint in direction 2 until
3 Spare tire the jack is firmly secured to prevent it
To prepare yourself for an emergency, you flying forward during a collision or sudden
should familiarize yourself with the use of braking.
the jack, each of the tools and their stor-
age locations.
When storing the jack, put it in place and
secure to prevent it from flying forward
during a collision or sudden braking.

232
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

To remove the spare tire under the lug- When connecting a jack handle extension 2. Remove the access hole cover on the
gage compartment: with a jack handle end, use a jack handle rear bumper with a flat−bladed screw-
1. Put a jack handle, jack handle exten- to tighten the bolts on the joints as shown driver.
sions and jack handle end together as in the illustration. When connecting the To protect the paint, place several sheets
shown in the illustration. jack handle with extension, tighten the of paper over the paintwork.
wing bolt on the joint securely. Make sure
1 Jack handle end the hollow meets the bolt on every joint
2 Jack handle extension when you tighten the bolts.
3 Jack handle
NOTICE
CAUTION
Tighten all the joints securely. Other-
Make sure they are each securely wise, the extension may come off and
fixed with screws. it may damage the paint or vehicle
body.

233
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

3. Insert the jack handle end into the low- 4. After the tire is lowered completely to When storing the spare tire, put it in place
ering screw through the access hole the ground, remove the holding bracket with the outer side of the wheel facing up
and turn it counterclockwise with push- as shown in the illustration. and hook the holding bracket as shown in
ing it to the front lightly. the illustration. Then secure the tire, tak-
ing care that the tire goes straight up
without catching on any other part, to pre-
vent it from moving during a collision or
sudden braking.
Check the tire from the side to see that
the tire is stored horizontally.

234
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Blocking the wheel —Removing wheel ornament —Loosening wheel nuts

2. Block the wheel diagonally opposite 3. Remove the wheel ornament. 4. Loosen all the wheel nuts.
the flat tire to keep the vehicle from Pry off the wheel ornament, using the Always loosen the wheel nuts before rais-
rolling when it is jacked up. beveled end of the wheel ornament remov- ing the vehicle.
When blocking the wheel, place a wheel er as shown. Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise to
block in front of one of the front wheels loosen. To get maximum leverage, fit the
or behind one of the rear wheels. CAUTION wrench to the nut so that the handle is on
the right side, as shown above. Grab the
Do not try to pull off the ornament by wrench near the end of the handle and
hand. Take due care in handling the pull up on the handle. Be careful that the
ornament to avoid unexpected person- wrench does not slip off the nut.
al injury.
Do not remove the nuts yet—just unscrew
them about one−half turn.

235
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Positioning the jack

JACK POINTS:
CAUTION
Front—Under the frame side rail
Left rear—Under the rear axle housing
Never use oil or grease on the bolts
Right rear—Under the bracket on the
or nuts. The nuts may loosen and the
rear axle housing
wheels may fall off, which could
cause a serious accident. Make sure the jack is positioned on a
level and solid place.

5. Position the jack at the correct jack

point as shown.

236
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Raising your vehicle

Put a jack handle, jack handle extensions, When connecting a jack handle extension 6. After making sure no one is in the
and jack handle end together as shown in with another extension and a jack handle vehicle, raise it high enough so that
the illustration. end, use a jack handle to tighten the bolts the spare tire can be installed.
1 Jack handle end on the joints as shown in the illustration. Remember you will need more ground
2 Jack handle extensions When connecting the jack handle with ex- clearance when putting on the spare tire
3 Jack handle tension, tighten the wing bolt on the jack than when removing the flat tire.
handle securely. Make sure the hollow
meets the bolt on any joint when you To raise the vehicle, insert the jack handle
CAUTION end into the joint of the jack (it is a loose
tighten the bolts.
fit) and turn it clockwise with the handle,
Make sure they are each securely making sure the handle remains firmly
NOTICE
fixed with screws. fitted onto the jack handle end. As the
Tighten all the joints securely. Other- jack touches the vehicle and begins to lift,
wise, the extension may come off and double−check that it is properly positioned.
it may damage the paint or vehicle
body.

237
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Changing wheels

CAUTION

Never get under the vehicle when the

vehicle is supported by the jack
alone.

7. Remove the wheel nuts and change Before putting on wheels, remove any cor-
tires. rosion on the mounting surfaces with a
Lift the flat tire straight off and put it wire brush or such. Installation of wheels
aside. without good metal−to−metal contact at the
mounting surface can cause wheel nuts to
Roll the spare wheel into position and loosen and eventually cause a wheel to
align the holes in the wheel with the bolts. come off while driving.
Then lift up the wheel and get at least the
top bolt started through its hole. Wiggle
the tire and press it back over the other
bolts.

238
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Reinstalling wheel nuts —Lowering your vehicle

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on the bolts

or nuts. Doing so may lead to over-
tightening the nuts and damaging the
bolts. The nuts may loosen and the
wheels may fall off, which could
cause a serious accident. If there is
oil or grease on any bolt or nut,
clean it.

8. Reinstall all the wheel nuts finger 9. Lower the vehicle completely and
tight. tighten the wheel nuts.
Reinstall the wheel nuts (tapered end in- Turn the jack handle extension counter-
ward) and tighten them as much as you clockwise with handle to lower the vehicle,
can by hand. Press back on the tire and making sure the handle remains firmly
see if you can tighten them more. fitted onto the jack handle extension.
Use only the wheel nut wrench and turn
it clockwise to tighten the nuts. Do not
use other tools or any additional leverage
other than your hands, such as a hammer,
pipe or your foot. Make sure the wrench
is securely engaged over the nut.
Tighten each nut a little at a time in the
order shown. Repeat the process until all
the nuts are tight.

239
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Reinstalling wheel ornament —After changing wheels

11. Check the air pressure of the re-
CAUTION placed tire.
Adjust the air pressure to the specification
 When lowering the vehicle, make
designated on page 298. If the pressure
sure all portions of your body and
is lower, drive slowly to the nearest ser-
all other persons around will not be
vice station and fill to the correct pres-
injured as the vehicle is lowered to
sure.
the ground.
Do not forget to reinstall the tire inflation
 Have the wheel nuts tightened with
a torque wrench to 131 N·m (13.4 valve cap as dirt and moisture could get
into the valve core and possibly cause air
kgf·m, 96.6 ft·lbf), as soon as pos-
leakage. If the cap is missing, have a new
sible after changing wheels. Other-
wise, the nuts may loosen and the one put on as soon as possible.
wheels may fall off, which could 12. Restow all the tools, jack and flat
cause a serious accident. 10. Reinstall the wheel ornament. tire securely.
Put the wheel ornament into position and As soon after changing wheels as pos-
then tap it firmly with the side or heel of sible, tighten the wheel nuts to the torque
your hand to snap it into place. specified on page 298 with a torque
wrench. Have a technician repair the flat
CAUTION tire.
This is the same procedure for changing
Take due care in handling the orna- or rotating your tires.
ment to avoid unexpected personal
injury.

240
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

If your vehicle becomes

stuck
If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow,
CAUTION NOTICE
mud, sand, etc., then you may attempt to
rock the vehicle free by moving it forward If you rock your vehicle, observe the
Before driving, make sure all the and backward. following precautions to prevent dam-
tools, jack and flat tire are securely
If your vehicle is equipped with the trac- age to the transmission and other
in place in their storage location to
tion control system, turn off the system to parts.
reduce the possibility of personal in-
become unstuck to allow the tires to spin z Do not depress the accelerator ped-
jury during a collision or sudden
enough to remove the vehicle from the al while shifting the selector lever
braking.
obstruction. (For details, see “Vehicle skid or before the transmission is com-
control system” on page 142.) pletely shifted to forward or reverse
gear.
CAUTION z Do not race the engine and avoid
spinning the wheels.
Do not attempt to rock the vehicle
free by moving it forward and back- z If your vehicle remains stuck after
ward if people or objects are any- rocking the vehicle several times,
where near the vehicle. During the consider other ways such as tow-
rocking operation the vehicle may ing.
suddenly move forward or backward
as it becomes unstuck, causing injury
or damage to nearby people or ob-
jects.

241
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

If your vehicle needs

to be towed—
If towing is necessary, we recommend (a) Towing with wheel lift type truck
(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck— you have it done by your Toyota dealer Use a towing dolly under the wheels not
—From front or a commercial tow truck service. In lifted by the truck.
consultation with them, have your ve-
hicle towed using either (a) or (b). (b) Using flat bed truck
Only when you cannot receive a towing
service from a Toyota dealer or com-
mercial tow truck service, tow your ve-
hicle carefully in accordance with the
instructions given in ”—Emergency tow-
ing” in this section.
—From rear
Proper equipment will help ensure that
your vehicle is not damaged while being
towed. Commercial operators are generally
aware of the state/provincial and local
laws pertaining to towing.
Your vehicle can be damaged if it is
towed incorrectly. Although most operators
know the correct procedure, it is possible
(b) Using flat bed truck to make a mistake. To avoid damage to
your vehicle, make sure the following pre-
cautions are observed. If necessary, show
this page to the tow truck driver.
TOWING PRECAUTIONS:
Use a safety chain system for all towing,
and abide by the state/provincial and local
laws. The wheels and axle on the ground
must be in good condition. If they are
damaged, use a towing dolly.

242
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Emergency towing
(c) Towing with sling type If towing is necessary, we recommend
truck you to have it done by your Toyota
dealer or a commercial tow truck ser-
vice.
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be tempo-
rarily towed by a cable or chain se-
cured to one of the following parts:
Front: Front emergency towing hook
Rear: Rear emergency towing hook
Use extreme caution when towing the
vehicle.
Front A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it
(c) Towing with sling type truck and operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done only
NOTICE on hard−surfaced roads for a short dis-
Do not tow with sling type truck, ei- tance and at low speeds. Also, the
ther from the front or rear. This may wheels, axles, drive train, steering and
cause body damage. brakes must all be in good condition.

Rear

243
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Emergency towing hook

precautions
 Before emergency towing, check that
CAUTION CAUTION the hook is not broken or damage and
that the installation bolts are not loose.
Use extreme caution when towing ve- If the engine is not running, the pow-
hicle. Avoid sudden starts or erratic er assist for the brakes and steering
 Fasten the towing cable or chain se-
curely to the hook.
driving maneuvers which would place will not work so steering and braking
excessive stress on the emergency will be much harder than usual.  Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady and
towing hook and towing cable or even force.
chain. The hook and towing cable or  To avoid damaging the hook, do not
chain may break and cause serious pull from the side or at a vertical
injury or damage. angle. Always pull straight ahead.

NOTICE
z Do not use front and rear eyelets.
It is not designed for towing.
z Use only a cable or chain specifi-
cally intended for use in towing ve-
hicles. Securely fasten the cable or
chain to the towing hook provided.

Before towing, release the parking brake

and put the transmission in ”N”. Unlock
the center differential. The key must be in
”ACC” (engine off) or ”ON” (engine run-
ning).

244
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

If you cannot shift automatic

—Tips for towing a stuck vehicle transmission selector lever
The following methods are effective to
CAUTION use when your vehicle is stuck in the
mud, sand or other condition from
If the emergency towing hook is used which the vehicle cannot be driven out
to get out when your vehicle becomes under its own power. Use extreme cau-
struck in mud, sand or other condi- tion when towing the vehicles. In addi-
tion from which the vehicle cannot be tion, keep away from the vehicles and
driven out under its own power, make towing cable or chain when towing.
sure to observe the precautions men-
tioned below. Otherwise, excessive
 Remove the sand soil in the front and
the back of the tires.
stress will be put on the hook and
the towing cable or chain may break,  Place stones or wood under the tires.
causing serious injury or damage.
 If the towing vehicle can hardly
move, do not forcibly continue the If you cannot shift the selector lever
towing. Contact your Toyota dealer out of ”P” position to other positions
or a commercial tow truck service even though the brake pedal is de-
for assistance. pressed, use the shift lock override but-
 Tow the vehicle as straight ahead ton as follows:
as possible. 1. Turn the ignition key to ”LOCK”
 Keep away from the vehicle during position. Make sure the parking
towing. brake is applied.
2. Pry up the cover with a flat−bladed
screwdriver or equivalent.

245
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

If you lose your keys

You can purchase a new key at your
Toyota dealer if you can give them the
key number and master key.
Even if you lose only one key, contact
your Toyota dealer to make a new key. If
you lose all your master keys, you cannot
make new keys; the whole engine immobi-
liser system must be replaced.
See the suggestion given in ”Keys” on
page 10.
You can use the wireless remote control
system with the new key. Contact your
Toyota dealer for detailed information.
3. Insert your finger into the hole to If your keys are locked in the vehicle and
push down the shift lock override you cannot get a duplicate, many Toyota
button. You can shift out of ”P” dealers can still open the door for you,
position only while pushing the but- using their special tools. If you must
ton. break a window to get in, we suggest
4. Shift into ”N” position. breaking the smallest side window be-
5. Reinstall the cover. cause it is the least expensive to replace.
Be extremely cautious to avoid cuts from
6. Start the engine. For your safety, the glass.
keep the brake pedal depressed.
Be sure to have the system checked by
your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

246
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

SECTION 5
CORROSION PREVENTION AND
APPEARANCE CARE
Protecting your Toyota from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Washing and waxing your Toyota . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Cleaning the interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

247
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Protecting your Toyota

from corrosion
Toyota, through its diligent research, de-  Wetness or dampness to certain parts  High pressure water or steam is effec-
sign and use of the most advanced of your vehicle for an extended period tive for cleaning the vehicle’s underside
technology available, helps prevent corro- of time, may cause corrosion even and wheel housings. Pay particular
sion and provides you with the finest qual- though other parts of the vehicle may attention to these areas as it is difficult
ity vehicle construction. Now, it is up to be dry. to see all the mud and dirt. It will do
you. Proper care of your Toyota can help  High ambient temperatures can cause more harm than good to simply wet the
ensure long−term corrosion prevention. corrosion to those components of the mud and debris without removing. The
The most common causes of corrosion vehicle which do not dry quickly due to lower edge of doors, rocker panels and
to your vehicle are: lack of proper ventilation. frame members have drain holes which
should not be allowed to clog with dirt
 The accumulation of road salt, dirt and The above signifies the necessity to keep as trapped water in these areas can
moisture in hard−to−reach areas under your vehicle, particularly the underside, as cause corrosion.
the vehicle. clean as possible and to repair any dam-
 Wash the underside of the vehicle thor-
 Chipping of paint, or undercoating age to paint or protective coatings as
oughly when winter is over.
caused by minor accidents or by soon as possible.
stones and gravel. To help prevent corrosion on your See ”Washing and waxing your Toyota” on
Toyota, follow these guidelines: page 249 for more tips.
Care is especially important if you live
in particular areas or operate your ve- Wash your vehicle frequently. It is, of Check the condition of your vehicle’s
hicle under certain environmental condi- course, necessary to keep your vehicle paint and trim. If you find any chips or
tions: clean by regular washing, but to prevent scratches in the paint, touch them up im-
mediately to prevent corrosion from start-
 Road salt or dust control chemicals will corrosion, the following points should be
ing. If the chips or scratches have gone
accelerate corrosion, as will the pres- observed:
through the bare metal, have a qualified
ence of salt in the air near the sea−  If you drive on salted roads in the body shop make the repair.
coast or in areas of industrial pollution. winter or if you live near the ocean,
 High humidity accelerates corrosion es- you should hose off the undercarriage
pecially when temperatures range just at least once a month to minimize cor-
above the freezing point. rosion.

248
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Washing and waxing your

Toyota
Check the interior of your vehicle. Wa- Washing your Toyota 1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Re-
ter and dirt can accumulate under the Keep your vehicle clean by regular move any mud or road salt from the
floor mats and could cause corrosion. Oc- washing. underside of the vehicle or in the
casionally check under the mats to make wheel wells.
sure the area is dry. Be particularly care- The following cases may cause weakness
to the paint or corrosion to the body and 2. Wash with a mild car−wash soap,
ful when transporting chemicals, cleans- mixed according to the manufacturer’s
ers, fertilizers, salt, etc.; these should be parts. Wash your vehicle as soon as pos-
sible. instructions. Use a soft cotton mitt and
transported in proper containers. If a spill keep it wet by dipping it frequently into
or leak should occur, immediately clean  When driving in a coastal area the wash water. Do not rub hard—let
and dry the area.  When driving on a road sprinkled with the soap and water remove the dirt.
Use mud shields on your wheels. If you antifreeze Plastic wheel ornaments: The plastic
drive on salted or gravel roads, mud  When having coal tar, tree sap, bird wheel ornaments are damaged easily by
shields help protect your vehicle. Full−size droppings and carcass of an insect organic substances. If any organic sub-
shields, which come as near to the ground stances splashes an ornament, be sure to
as possible, are the best. We recommend  When driving in the areas where there
is a lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dust wash it off with water and check if the
that the fittings and the area where the ornament is damaged.
shields are installed be treated to resist and chemical substances
corrosion. Your Toyota dealer will be  When the vehicle becomes remarkably CAUTION
happy to assist in supplying and installing dirty with dust and mud
the shields if they are recommended for Hand−washing your Toyota Do not attach the heavily damaged
your area.
Work in the shade and wait until the plastic wheel ornament. It may fly off
Keep your vehicle in a well ventilated vehicle body is not hot to the touch. the wheel and cause accidents while
garage or a roofed place. Do not park the vehicle is moving.
your vehicle in a damp, poorly venti-
CAUTION
lated garage. If you wash your vehicle in
Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soap
the garage, or if you drive it covered with
When cleaning under floor or chassis, or neutral detergent.
water or snow, your garage may be so
be careful not to injure your hands. Plastic bumpers: Wash carefully. Do not
damp and it will cause corrosion. Even if
your garage is heated, a wet vehicle can scrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumper
corrode if the ventilation is poor. faces are soft.

249
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Road tar: Remove with turpentine or Automatic car wash Waxing your Toyota
cleaners that are marked safe for painted Your vehicle may be washed in an auto- Polishing and waxing is recommended
surfaces. matic car wash, but remember that the to maintain the original beauty of your
paint can be scratched by some types of Toyota’s finish.
NOTICE
brushes, unfiltered washing water, or the Apply wax once a month or if the vehicle
Do not use organic substances (gaso- washing process itself. Scratching reduces surface does not repel water well.
line kerosene, benzine or strong sol- paint durability and gloss, especially on
darker colors. The manager of the car 1. Always wash and dry the vehicle be-
vents) which may be toxic or cause
wash should be able to advise you wheth- fore you begin waxing, even if you are
damage.
er the process is safe for the paint on using a combined cleaner and wax.
your vehicle. 2. Use a good quality polish and wax. If
3. Rinse thoroughly—dried soap can
the finish has become extremely weath-
cause streaking. In hot weather you NOTICE ered, use a car−cleaning polish, fol-
may need to rinse each section right
lowed by a separate wax. Carefully fol-
after you wash it. To prevent damage to the antenna,
low the manufacturer’s instructions and
4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicle make sure it is retracted before driv-
precautions. Be sure to polish and wax
using a clean soft cotton towel. Do not ing your Toyota through an automatic
the chrome trim as well as the paint.
rub or press hard—you might scratch car wash.
Windshield washer nozzles: Make sure
the paint.
that the nozzles do not become blocked
when waxing. If a nozzle becomes
blocked, contact your Toyota dealer to
have the vehicle serviced.

NOTICE
If a nozzle becomes blocked, do not
try to clear it with a pin or other
object. The nozzle will be damaged.

250
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Cleaning the interior

3. Wax the vehicle again when water Vinyl interior
does not bead but remains on the sur- CAUTION
The vinyl upholstery may be easily
face in large patches. cleaned with a mild soap or detergent
 Vehicles with side airbags and cur-
and water.
NOTICE tain shield airbags:
First vacuum over the upholstery to re-
Be careful not to splash water or
Always remove the plastic bumpers if move loose dirt. Then, using a sponge or
spill liquid on the floor. This may
your vehicle is re−painted and placed soft cloth, apply the soap solution to the
in a high heat paint waxing booth. prevent the side and curtain shield
vinyl. After allowing it to soak in for a few
High temperatures could damage the airbags from activating correctly, re-
sulting in serious injury. minutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirt
bumpers. and wipe off the soap with a clean damp
 Do not wash the vehicle floor with cloth. If all the dirt do not come off, re-
water, or allow water to get onto peat the procedure. Commercial foaming−
the floor when cleaning the vehicle type vinyl cleaners are also available
interior or exterior. Water may get which work well. Follow the manufacturer’s
into audio components or other instructions.
electrical components above or un-
der the floor carpet (or mat) and NOTICE
cause a malfunction; and it may
cause body corrosion. Do not use solvent, thinner, gasoline
or window cleaner on the interior.

251
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Carpets
NOTICE NOTICE
Use a good foam−type shampoo to
clean the carpets. z Do not use dye or bleach on the z Do not use organic substances (sol-
belts—it may weaken them. vents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline,
Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to remove
z Do not use the belts until they be- etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.
as much dirt as possible. Several types of
come dry. These chemicals can cause discol-
foam cleaners are available; some are in
oring, staining or peeling of the
aerosol cans and others are powders or
surface.
liquids which you mix with water to pro- Windows
duce a foam. To shampoo the carpets, z If you use cleaners or polishing
The windows may be cleaned with any agents, make sure their ingredients
use a sponge or brush to apply the foam.
household window cleaner. do not include the substances men-
Rub in overlapping circles.
tioned above.
Do not apply water—the best results are NOTICE
obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as z If you use a liquid car freshener, do
possible. Read the shampoo instructions When cleaning the inside of the rear not spill the liquid onto the ve-
and follow them closely. window, be careful not to scratch or hicle’s interior surfaces. It may con-
damage the heater wires or connec- tain the ingredients mentioned
Seat belts tors. above. Immediately clean any spill
The seat belts may be cleaned with using the method mentioned above.
mild soap and water or with lukewarm Air conditioning control panel, car au-
water. dio, instrument panel, console panel,
Use a cloth or sponge. As you are clean- and switches
ing, check the belts for excessive wear, Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.
fraying, or cuts.
Soak a clean soft cloth in water or luke-
warm water then lightly wipe off dirt.

252
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Leather Interior
z Mildew may develop on soiled leath-
The leather upholstery may be cleaned er upholstery. Be especially careful
with neutral detergent for wool. to avoid oil spots. Try to keep your
Remove dirt using a soft cloth dampened upholstery always clean.
with 5% solution of neutral detergent for z Long exposure to direct sunlight
wool. Then thoroughly wipe off all traces may cause the leather surface to
of detergent with a clean damp cloth. harden and shrink. Keep your ve-
After cleaning or whenever any part of the hicle in a shaded area, especially in
leather gets wet, dry with a soft clean the summer.
cloth. Allow the leather to dry in a venti- z The interior of your vehicle is apt
lated shaded area. to heat up on hot summer days, so
avoid placing on the upholstery
NOTICE
items made of vinyl or plastic or
z If a stain should fail to come out containing wax as these tend to
with a neutral detergent, apply a stick to leather when warm.
cleaner that does not contain an z Improper cleaning of the leather up-
organic solvent. holstery could result in discolor-
z Never use organic substances such ation or staining.
as benzine, alcohol or gasoline, or
alkaline or acid solutions for clean- If you have any questions about the
ing the leather as these could cleaning of your Toyota, your local
cause discoloring. Toyota dealer will be pleased to answer
z Use of a nylon brush or synthetic them.
fiber cloth, etc. may scratch the
fine grained surface of the leather.

253
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

254
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

SECTION 6
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND CARE
Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Does your vehicle need repairing? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Emissions inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs . . . . . . . . . 260

For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the

”Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or ”Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

255
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Maintenance requirements
Your Toyota vehicle has been designed for Scheduled maintenance Where to go for service?
fewer maintenance requirements with long- The scheduled maintenance items listed in Toyota technicians are well−trained spe-
er service intervals to save both your time the ”Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or cialists and are kept up to date with the
and money. However, each regular mainte- ”Owner’s Manual Supplement” are those latest service information through technical
nance, as well as day−to−day care, is required to be serviced at regular inter- bulletins, service tips, and in−dealership
more important than ever before to ensure vals. training programs. They learn to work on
smooth, trouble−free, safe, and economical Toyotas before they work on your vehicle,
driving. For details of your maintenance schedule,
read the ”Scheduled Maintenance Guide” rather than while they are working on it.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make or ”Owner’s Manual Supplement”. You can be confident that your Toyota
sure the specified maintenance, including dealer’s service department performs the
general maintenance service, is performed. It is recommended that only genuine
Toyota parts be used for maintenance best job to meet the maintenance require-
Note that both the new vehicle and ments on your vehicle–reliably and eco-
emission control system warranties specify or for the repair of the emission con-
trol system. nomically.
that proper maintenance and care must be
performed. See ”Owner’s Warranty The owner may elect to use non−Toyota Your copy of the repair order is proof that
Information Booklet” or ”Owner’s Manual supplied parts for replacement pur- all required maintenance has been per-
Supplement” for complete warranty poses without invalidating the emission formed for warranty coverage. If any prob-
information. control system warranty. However, use lems should arise with your vehicle while
of replacement parts which are not of under warranty, your Toyota dealer will
General maintenance promptly take care of it. Again, be sure
equivalent quality may impair the effec-
General maintenance items are those day− tiveness of the emission control sys- to keep a copy of the repair order for any
to−day care practices that are important to tems. service performed on your Toyota.
your vehicle for proper operation. It is the What about do−it−yourself maintenance?
owner’s responsibility to ensure that the You may also elect to have mainte-
general maintenance items are performed nance, replacement, or repair of the Many of the maintenance items are easy
regularly. emission control devices and system to do yourself if you have a little mechani-
performed by any automotive repair es- cal ability and a few basic automotive
These checks or inspections can be done tablishment or individual without invali- tools. Simple instructions for how to per-
either by yourself or a qualified technician, dating this warranty. See ”Owner’s War- form them are presented in Section 7.
or if you prefer, your Toyota dealer will be ranty Information Booklet” or ”Owner’s
pleased to do them at a nominal cost. Manual Supplement” for complete war-
ranty information.
256
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

General maintenance
If you are a skilled do−it−yourself Listed below are the general maintenance Tire surface and wheel nuts
mechanic, the Toyota service manuals are items that should be performed as fre- Check the tires carefully for cuts, damage
recommended. Please be aware that quently as specified. In addition to check- or excessive wear. See page 275 for addi-
do−it−yourself maintenance can affect your ing the items listed, if you notice any tional information. When checking the
warranty coverage. See ”Owner’s Warranty unusual noise, smell or vibration, you tires, make sure no nuts are missing, and
Information Booklet” or ”Owner’s Manual should investigate the cause or take your check the nuts for looseness. Tighten
Supplement” for the details. vehicle to your Toyota dealer or a quali- them if necessary.
fied service shop immediately. It is recom- Tire rotation
mended that any problem you notice be Rotate the tires according to the mainte-
brought to the attention of your dealer or nance schedule. (For scheduled mainte-
the qualified service shop for their advice. nance information, please refer to the
”Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or ”Own-
CAUTION er’s Manual Supplement”.) See page 276
for additional information.
Make these checks only with ade-
Fluid leaks
quate ventilation if you run the en-
Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, wa-
gine.
ter or other fluid after the vehicle has
been parked for a while. If you smell fuel
OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE fumes or notice any leak, have the cause
Items listed below should be performed found and corrected immediately.
from time to time, unless otherwise Doors and engine hood
specified. Check that all doors and back door oper-
Tire pressure ate smoothly and all latches lock securely.
Check the pressure with a gauge every Make sure the engine hood secondary
two weeks, or at least once a month. See latch secures the hood from opening when
page 274 for additional information. the primary latch is released.

257
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

INSIDE THE VEHICLE Seat belts Automatic transmission ”Park” mecha-

Items listed below should be checked Check that the seat belt system such as nism
regularly, e.g. while performing periodic buckles, retractors and anchors operate Check the lock release button of the se-
services, cleaning the vehicle, etc. properly and smoothly. Make sure the belt lector lever for proper and smooth opera-
webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or dam- tion. On a safe incline, check that your
Lights aged. vehicle is held securely with the selector
Make sure the headlights, stop lights, tail lever in ”P” position and all brakes re-
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights Accelerator pedal
Check the pedal for smooth operation and leased.
are all working. Check headlight aim.
uneven pedal effort or catching. IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Service reminder indicators and warning
buzzers Brake pedal Items listed below should be checked
Check that all service reminder indicators Check the pedal for smooth operation and from time to time, e.g. each time when
and warning buzzers function properly. that the pedal has the proper clearance. refueling.
Check the brake booster function. Washer fluid
Steering wheel
Be alert for changes in steering condition, Brakes Make sure there is sufficient fluid in the
such as hard steering or strange noise. At a safe place, check that the brakes do tank. See page 285 for additional informa-
not pull to one side when applied. tion.
Seats
Check that all front seat controls such as Parking brake Engine coolant level
seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. op- Check that the lever has the proper travel Make sure the coolant level is between
erate smoothly and that all latches lock and that, on a safe incline, your vehicle the ”FULL” and ”LOW” lines on the see−
securely in any position. Check that the is held securely with only the parking through reservoir when the engine is cold.
head restraint move up and down smooth- brake applied. See page 270 for additional information.
ly and that the locks hold securely in any Radiator, condenser and hoses
latched position. For folding−down rear Check that the front of the radiator and
seatbacks, swing−up rear seat cushions condenser are clean and not blocked with
and detachable third seats, check that the leaves, dirt, or insects. See page 272 for
latches lock securely. additional information.

258
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Does your vehicle need

repairing?
Battery electrolyte level Be on the alert for changes in perfor-  Engine continually runs hot; oil pres-
Make sure the electrolyte level of all bat- mance, sounds, and visual tip−offs that sure gauge stays low
tery cells is between upper and lower lev- indicate service is needed. Some impor- If you notice any of these clues, take your
el lines on the case. Add only distilled tant clues are as follows: vehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon as
water when replenishing. See page 282 for  Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging possible. It probably needs adjustment or
additional information. repair.
 Appreciable loss of power
Brake fluid level
Make sure the brake fluid level is correct.  Strange engine noises
CAUTION
See page 272 for additional information.  A fluid leak under the vehicle (however,
Engine oil level water dripping from the air conditioning Do not continue driving with the ve-
Check the level on the dipstick with the after use is normal.) hicle unchecked. It could result in se-
engine turned off and the vehicle parked  Change in exhaust sound (This may rious vehicle damage and possibly
on a level ground. See page 268 for addi- indicate a dangerous carbon monoxide personal injury.
tional information. leak. Drive with the windows open and
Power steering fluid level have the exhaust system checked im-
Check the level through the reservoir. The mediately.)
level should be in the ”HOT” or ”COLD”  Flat−looking tire; excessive tire squeal
range depending on the fluid temperature. when cornering; uneven tire wear
See page 273 for additional information.  Vehicle pulls to one side when driving
Exhaust system straight on a level road
If you notice any change in the sound of  Strange noises related to suspension
the exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, have movement
the cause located and corrected immedi-
ately. (See ”Engine exhaust cautions” on  Loss of brake effectiveness; spongy
page 197.) feeling brake pedal; pedal almost
touches floor; vehicle pulls to one side
when braking
 Engine coolant temperature continually
higher than normal

259
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Emissions Inspection and

Maintenance (I/M) programs
Some states have vehicle emission in- The malfunction indicator lamp will go off
spection programs which include OBD after taking several driving trips, but the
(On−Board Diagnostics) checks. error code in the OBD system will not be
The OBD system monitors the operation cleared unless about 40 trips or more are
of the emission control system. When the taken.
OBD system determines that a problem If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
exists somewhere in the emission control even the malfunction indicator lamp does
system, the malfunction indicator lamp not come on, contact your Toyota dealer
comes on. In this case, your vehicle may to prepare the vehicle for re−testing.
not pass the I/M test and need to be
repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to
service the vehicle.
Even if the malfunction indicator lamp
does not come on, your vehicle may not
pass the I/M test as readiness codes
have not been set in the OBD system.
Readiness codes are automatically set
during ordinary driving. However, when the
battery is disconnected or run down, the
codes are erased. Also, depending on
your driving habits, the codes may not be
completely set.
Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp had
come on recently due to temporary mal-
function such as a loose fuel tank cap,
your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

260
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

SECTION 7− 1
DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
Introduction
Engine compartment overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Fuse locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Do−it−yourself service precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Parts and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

261
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Engine compartment overview

1. Engine oil filler cap
2. Brake fluid reservoir
3. Fuse block
4. Battery
5. Windshield and rear window washer
fluid tank
6. Engine oil level dipstick
7. Condenser
8. Radiator
9. Engine coolant reservoir
10. Power steering fluid reservoir

262
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Fuse locations
Spare fuses
1

Spare fuses

263
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Do−it−yourself service
precautions
CAUTION
If you perform maintenance by yourself,
be sure to follow the correct procedure  When the engine is running, keep
given in this section. hands, clothing, and tools away
You should be aware that improper or in- from the moving fan and engine
complete servicing may result in operating drive belts. (Removing rings,
problems. watches, and ties is advisable.)
Performing do−it−yourself maintenance  Right after driving, the engine
during the warranty period may affect your compartment—the engine, radiator,
warranty coverage. Read the separate exhaust manifold, power steering
Toyota Warranty statement for details and fluid reservoir and spark plug
suggestions. boots, etc.—will be hot. So be care-
ful not to touch them. Oil, fluids
This part gives instructions only for those
and spark plugs may also be hot.
items that are relatively easy for an owner
to perform. As explained in Section 6,  If the engine is hot, do not remove
there are still a number of items that must the radiator cap or loosen the drain
be done by a qualified technician with plugs to prevent burning yourself.
special tools.  Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-
For information on tools and parts for do− low open flames around fuel or the
it−yourself maintenance, see ”Parts and battery. Their fumes are flammable.
tools” on page 266.  Be extremely cautious when work-
Utmost care should be taken when work- ing on the battery. It contains poi-
ing on your vehicle to prevent accidental sonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.
injury. Here are a few precautions that  Warning: Battery posts, terminals
you should be especially careful to ob- and related accessories contain lead
serve: and lead compounds, chemicals
know to the State of California to
cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Wash hands after handling.

264
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

 Do not get under your vehicle with  Dispose of used oil and filter only z Use only spark plugs of the speci-
just the body jack supporting it. Al- in a safe and acceptable manner. fied type. Using other types will
ways use automotive jack stands or Do not dispose of used oil and fil- cause engine damage, loss of per-
other solid supports. ter in household trash, in sewers or formance or radio noise.
 Be sure that the ignition is off if onto the ground. Call your dealer or z Do not reuse iridium−tipped spark
you work near the electric cooling a service station for information plugs by cleaning or regapping.
fan or radiator grille. With the igni- concerning recycling or disposal.
z Do not overfill automatic transmis-
tion on, the electric cooling fan will
sion fluid, transfer oil and power
automatically start to run if the air
NOTICE steering fluid, or the transmission,
conditioning is on.
transfer and power steering could
 Use eye protection whenever you
z Remember that battery and ignition be damaged.
work on or under your vehicle
cables carry high currents or volt- z Do not drive with the air cleaner
where you may be exposed to flying
ages. Be careful of accidentally filter removed, or excessive engine
or falling material, fluid spray, etc.
causing a short circuit.
 Used engine oil contains potentially wear could result. Also backfiring
harmful contaminants which may z Add only demineralized or distilled could cause a fire in the engine
cause skin disorders such as in- water to fill the radiator. And if you compartment.
flammation or skin cancer, so care spill some of the coolant, be sure z Be careful not to scratch the glass
should be taken to avoid prolonged to wash it off with water to prevent surface with the wiper frame.
and repeated contact with it. To re- it from damaging the parts or paint.
z When closing the engine hood,
move used engine oil from your z Do not allow dirt or anything else
skin, wash thoroughly with soap check to see that you have not for-
to fall through the plug holes. gotten any tools, rags, etc.
and water.
z Do not pry the outer electrode of a
 Do not leave used oil within the
spark plug against the center elec-
reach of children.
trode.

265
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Parts and tools

Here is a list of parts and tools you will CHECKING BRAKE FLUID CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES
need to perform do−it−yourself mainte- Parts (if level is low): Parts (if replacement is necessary):
nance. Remember all Toyota parts are de-
signed in metric sizes, so your tools must  SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3  Fuse with same amperage rating as
be metric. brake fluid original
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL Tools: ADDING WASHER FLUID

Parts (if level is low):  Rag or paper towel Parts:

 “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equiva-  Funnel (only for adding fluid)  Water
lent. See ”Checking the engine oil lev- CHECKING POWER STEERING FLUID  Washer fluid containing antifreeze (for
el” on page 269 for instructions. Parts (if level is low): winter use)
Tools: Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON II Tools:
 Rag or paper towel or III  Funnel
 Funnel (only for adding oil) Tools: REPLACING LIGHT BULBS
CHECKING THE ENGINE COOLANT LEV-  Rag or paper towel Parts:
EL  Funnel (only for adding fluid)  Bulb with same number and wattage
Parts (if level is low): CHECKING BATTERY CONDITION rating as original (See charts in ”Re-
 ”Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” or Tools:
placing light bulbs” on page 285.)
equivalent. See “Checking the engine Tools:
coolant level” on page 270 for instruc-  Warm water
 Screwdriver
tions.  Baking soda
 Demineralized or distilled water  Grease
Tools:  Conventional wrench (for terminal
 Funnel (only for adding coolant) clamp bolts)

266
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

SECTION 7− 2
DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
Engine and Chassis
Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Checking the engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Checking the radiator and condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Checking brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Checking power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Checking tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Checking and replacing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Rotating tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Installing snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Replacing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Aluminum wheel precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

267
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Checking the engine oil level

4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oil
Low level Full level level while holding a rag under the
end.

CAUTION

Be careful not to touch the hot ex-

haust manifold.

NOTICE
Add oil O.K. Too full
Be careful not to drop the engine oil
on the vehicle components.
With the engine at operating tempera- 3. Standing up on the left side of the
ture and turned off, check the oil level vehicle, reinsert the dipstick in the di- If the oil level is below or only slightly
on the dipstick. rection so that the ”ENGINE OIL” on above the low level, add engine oil of
top should be read correctly and push the same type as already in the engine.
1. To get a true reading, the vehicle
should be on a level ground. After turn- it in as far as it will go, or the reading Remove the oil filler cap and add engine
ing off the engine, wait a few minutes will not be correct. oil in small quantities at a time, checking
for the oil to drain back into the bottom the dipstick. We recommend that you use
of the engine. a funnel when adding the oil.
2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag under The approximate quantity of oil needed to
the end and wipe it clean. fill between the low level and the full level
on the dipstick is indicated below for ref-
erence.
When the level reaches within the correct
range, install the filler cap hand−tight.
Oil quantity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):
1.5 (1.6, 1.3)

268
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

ENGINE OIL SELECTION

NOTICE
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is filled in
z Be careful not to spill the engine your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved
oil on the vehicle components. “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
z Avoid overfilling, or the engine to satisfy the following grade and viscos-
could be damaged. ity.
z Check the oil level on the dipstick Oil grade:
once again after adding the oil. Use API grade, SL “Energy−Conserving”
or ILSAC multigrade engine oil.
Recommended viscosity:
SAE 5W−30

API service symbol

Temperature range anticipated before next oil

change

SAE 5W−30 is the best choice for

good fuel economy, and good starting
in cold weather.
If SAE 5W−30 oil is not available,
SAE 10W−30 oil may be used. Howev-
er, it should be replaced with SAE ILSAC certification mark
5W−30 at the next oil change.
269
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Checking the engine coolant

level
Oil identification marks Look at the see−through coolant reser-
Either or both API registered marks are voir when the engine is cold. The cool-
added to some oil containers to help ant level is satisfactory if it is between
you select the oil you should use. the ”FULL” and ”LOW” lines on the
reservoir. If the level is low, add ethyl-
The API Service Symbol is located any- ene−glycol type coolant for proper cor-
where on the outside of the container. rosion protection of aluminum compo-
The top portion of the label shows the oil nents.
quality by API (American Petroleum Insti- The coolant level in the reservoir will vary
tute) designations such as SL. The center with engine temperature. However, if the
portion of the label shows the SAE viscos- level is on or below the ”LOW” line, add
ity grade such as SAE 5W−30. ”Energy− coolant. Bring the level up to the ”FULL”
Conserving” shown in the lower portion, line.
indicates that the oil has fuel−saving ca-
pabilities. Always use ethylene−glycol type coolant
To ensure excellent lubrication perfor-
mance for your engine, “Toyota Genuine for a proper corrosion protection of alumi-
The ILSAC (International Lubricant Stan- num components. See information in the
dardization and Approval Committee) Certi- Motor Oil” is available, which has been
next column.
fication Mark is displayed on the front of specifically tested and approved for all
the container. Toyota engines. If the coolant level drops within a short
time after replenishing, there may be a
Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-
ther details about “Toyota Genuine Motor leak in the system. Visually check the
radiator, hoses, radiator cap and drain
Oil”.
cock and water pump.
If you can find no leak, have your Toyota
dealer test the cap pressure and check
for leaks in the cooling system.

270
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Read the coolant container for information

CAUTION on freeze protection. Follow the manufac-
turer’s directions for how much to mix
To prevent burning yourself, do not with plain water (preferably demineralized
remove the radiator cap when the en- water or distilled water). The total capacity
gine is hot. of the cooling system is given in Section
8.
Coolant type selection We recommend a 50% solution for your
Use of improper coolants may damage Toyota, to provide protection down to
your engine cooling system. Your coolant about −35 C (−31 F). When it is extreme-
must contain ethylene−glycol type coolant ly cold, to provide protection down to
for proper corrosion protection of your about −50°C (−58°F), a 60% solution is
engine that contains aluminum recommended. Do not use more than 70%
components. We have used “Toyota solution for better coolant performance.
Genuine Long Life Coolant” in your Toyota The engine cooling system is integral to
vehicle. In order to avoid technical NOTICE maximizing performance of your Toyota
problems, we strongly recommend using vehicle. In line with this, it is strongly
Do not use alcohol type antifreeze or recommended that you use “Toyota Genu-
“Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” or
plain water alone. ine Long Life Coolant” for protecting the
equivalent.
system, as it is an ethylene−glycol based
In addition to preventing freezing and sub- premium antifreeze coolant with excellent
sequent damage to the engine, this type corrosion protection properties that has
of coolant will prevent corrosion. Further been specifically formulated for use in
supplemental inhibitors or additives are Toyota vehicles.
neither needed nor recommended.
Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-
ther details about “Toyota Genuine Long
Life Coolant”.

271
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Checking the radiator and

condenser Checking brake fluid
If any of the above parts are extremely If the level is low, add SAE J1703 or
dirty or you are not sure of their condi- FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3 brake fluid to
tion, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer. the brake reservoir.
Refilling brake fluid:
CAUTION
1. Turn the ignition switch off.
To prevent burning yourself, be care- 2. Depress the brake pedal more than 40
ful not to touch the radiator or con- times.
denser when the engine is hot. 3. Remove the reservoir cap by hand.
Add brake fluid up to the ”MAX” line.

NOTICE If you do not follow the procedure above,

the reservoir may overflow.
To prevent damage to the radiator Use only newly opened brake fluid. Once
and condenser, do not perform the opened, brake fluid absorbs moisture from
To check the fluid level, simply look at
work by yourself. the air, and excess moisture can cause a
the see−through reservoir. The level
should be between the ”MAX” and dangerous loss of braking.
”MIN” lines on the reservoir.
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go CAUTION
down slightly as the brake pads wear or
when the fluid level in the accumulator is Take care when filling the reservoir
high. because brake fluid can harm your
eyes and damage painted surfaces. If
If the reservoir needs frequent refueling, fluid gets in your eyes, flush your
it may indicate a serious mechanical prob- eyes with clean water immediately. If
lem. you still feel uncomfortable with your
eyes, go to the doctor.

272
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Checking power steering fluid

Clean all dirt from outside of the reservoir
NOTICE
tank and look at the fluid level. If the fluid
If you spill the fluid, be sure to wipe If cold is cold, the level should be in the ”COLD”
it off to prevent it from damaging the If hot O.K. range. Similarly, if it is hot, the fluid level
O.K. Open
parts or painting. Close should be in the ”HOT” range. If the level
is at the low side of either range, add
automatic transmission fluid DEXRONII
or III to bring the level within the range.
To remove the reservoir cap, turn it coun-
If cold terclockwise and lift up. To reinstall it,
add turn it clockwise. After replacing the filler
If hot
add
cap, visually check the steering box case,
vane pump and hose connections for
leaks or damage.
Check the fluid level on the dipstick. If
necessary, add automatic transmission CAUTION
fluid DEXRON I I or III.
If the vehicle has been driven around 80 The reservoir tank may be hot so be
km/h (50 mph) for 20 minutes (a little careful not to burn yourself.
more in frigid temperatures), the fluid is
hot (60 C—80 C or 140 F—175 F). You
may also check the level when the fluid NOTICE
is cold (about room temperature,
Avoid overfilling, or the power steer-
10 C—30 C or 50 F—85 F) if the engine
ing could be damaged.
has not been run for about five hours.

273
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Checking tire pressure

The following instructions for checking
CAUTION tire pressure should be observed:

Keep your tire pressure properly in-

 The pressure should be checked only
when the tires are cold. If your ve-
flated. Otherwise, the following condi-
hicle has been parked for at least 3
tions may occur and cause an acci-
72c501 hours and has not been driven for
dent resulting in death or serious in-
more than 1.5 km or 1 mile since, you
juries.
will get an accurate cold tire pressure
Low tire pressure (underinflation)— reading.
 Excessive wear  Always use a tire pressure gauge.
 Uneven wear The appearance of a tire can be mis-
leading. Besides, tire pressures that
 Poor handling
are even just a few pounds off can
 Possibility of blowouts from over- degrade ride and handling.
Keep your tire pressures at the proper heated tire
level.  Do not bleed or reduce tire pressure
 Poor sealing of the tire bead after driving. It is normal for the tire
The recommended cold tire pressures, tire
size and the vehicle capacity weight are  Wheel deformation and/or tire sepa- pressure to be higher after driving.
given on page 294. ration  Never exceed the vehicle capacity
High tire pressure (overinflation)— weight. The passenger and luggage
You should check the tire pressures every
weight should be located so that the
two weeks, or at least once a month. And  Poor handling
vehicle is balanced.
don’t forget the spare!  Excessive wear at the center of the
Incorrect tire pressure may waste fuel, tire tread
 Be sure to reinstall the tire inflation
valve caps. Without the valve caps,
reduce the comfort of driving, reduce tire  A greater possibility of tire damage dirt or moisture could get into the valve
life and make your vehicle less safe to from road hazards
drive. core and cause air leakage. If the caps
have been lost, have new ones put on
If a tire frequently needs refilling, have it as soon as possible.
checked by your Toyota dealer.

274
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Checking and replacing tires

If you have tire damage such as cuts, Using any other size or type of tire may
Tread wear indicator splits, cracks deep enough to expose seriously affect handling, ride, speedome-
the fabric, or bulges indicating internal ter/odometer calibration, ground clearance,
damage, the tire should be replaced. and clearance between the body and tires
If a tire often goes flat or cannot be prop- or snow chains.
erly repaired due to the size or location
of a cut or other damage, it should be CAUTION
replaced. If you are not sure, consult with
your Toyota dealer. Observe the following instructions.
Otherwise, an accident may occur re-
If an air loss occurs while driving, do not
sulting in death or serious injuries.
continue driving with a deflated tire. Driv-
ing even a short distance can damage a  Do not mix radial, bias belted, or
tire beyond repair. bias−ply tires on your vehicle, as
this may cause dangerous handling
CHECKING YOUR TIRES Any tires which are over 6 years old
characteristics resulting in loss of
Check the tire tread for the tread wear must be checked by a qualified techni-
control.
cian even if damage is not obvious.
indicators. If the indicators show, re-  Do not use tires other than the
place the tires. Tires deteriorate with age even if they
manufacturer’s recommended size,
have never or seldom been used.
The tires on your Toyota have built−in as this may cause dangerous han-
tread wear indicators to help you know This also applies to the spare tire and dling characteristics resulting in
when the tires need replacement. When tires stored for future use. loss of control.
the tread depth wears to 1.6 mm (0.06 REPLACING YOUR TIRES  Do not use tires of different brands,
in.) or less, the indicators will appear. If sizes, construction or tread pat-
you can see the indicators in two or more When replacing a tire, use a tire of the
same size and construction, and the terns, as this may cause dangerous
adjacent grooves, the tire should be re- handling characteristics resulting in
placed. The lower the tread, the higher same or greater load capacity as the
originally installed tires. Also, all the loss of control.
the risk of skidding.
tires must be the same brand and have
The effectiveness of snow tires is lost the same tread patterns.
if the tread wears down below 4 mm
(0.16 in.).

275
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Rotating tires
Toyota recommends all four tires, or at When rotating tires, check for uneven
least both front or rear tires be re- wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usu-
placed as a set. ally caused by incorrect tire pressure, im-
See ”If you have a flat tire” on page 231 proper wheel alignment, out−of−balance
for tire change procedure. wheels, or severe braking.

When a tire is replaced, the wheel

should always be balanced.
An unbalanced wheel may affect vehicle
handling and tire life. Wheels can get out
of balance with regular use and should
therefore be balanced occasionally.
When replacing a tubeless tire, the air
valve should also be replaced with a
new one. To equalize tire wear and help extend
tire life, Toyota recommends that you
rotate your tires according to the main-
tenance schedule. (For scheduled main-
tenance information, please refer to the
”Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or
”Owner’s Manual Supplement”.) Howev-
er, the most appropriate timing for tire
rotation may vary according to your
driving habits and road surface condi-
tions.
See ”If you have a flat tire” on page 231
for tire change procedure.

276
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Installing snow tires

and chains
WHEN TO USE SNOW TIRES OR SNOW TIRE INSTALLATION
CHAINS CAUTION
Snow tires should be installed on all
Snow tires or chains are recommended wheels.
Observe the following instructions.
when driving on snow or ice. Installing snow tires on the rear wheels
Otherwise, an accident may occur re-
On wet or dry roads, conventional tires sulting in death or serious injuries. only can lead to an excessive difference
provide better traction than snow tires.  Do not use snow tires other than in road grip capability between the front
SNOW TIRE SELECTION and rear tires which could cause loss of
the manufacturer’s recommended
vehicle control.
If you need snow tires, select tires of size, as this may cause dangerous
the same size, construction and load handling characteristics resulting in When storing removed tires, you should
capacity as the originally installed tires. loss of control. store them in a cool dry space.
Also, all the tires must be the same  Do not use snow tires of different Mark the direction of rotation and be sure
brand and have the same tread pat- brands, sizes, construction or tread to install them in the same direction when
terns. patterns, as this may cause danger- replacing.
Do not use tires other than those men- ous handling characteristics result-
tioned above. Do not install studded tires ing in loss of control. CAUTION
without first checking local regulations for
possible restrictions.  Do not drive with the snow tires
incorrectly inflated.
 Never drive over 105 km/h (65 mph)
with any type of snow tires.

277
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Regulations regarding the use of tire

Side chain chains vary according to location or CAUTION
type of road, so always check the local
regulations before installing chains.  Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) or
the chain manufacturer’s recom-
NOTICE mended speed limit, whichever is
lower.
Cross chain If the wrong combination of tire and
chain is used, the chains could dam-
 Drive carefully avoiding bumps,
holes, and sharp turns, which may
age the vehicle body.
cause the vehicle to bounce.

CHAIN INSTALLATION  Avoid sharp turns or locked−wheel

braking, as use of chains may ad-
Install the chains on the rear tires as versely affect vehicle handling.
tightly as possible. Do not use tire
TIRE CHAIN SELECTION chains on the front tires. Retighten  When driving with chains installed,
chains after driving 0.5—1.0 km be sure to drive carefully. Slow
Use the tire chains of correct size. down before entering curves to
(1/4—1/2 mile).
Use the following type chains. avoid losing control of the vehicle.
When installing chains on your tires, care- Otherwise an accident may occur.
For P275/65R17 113S and P275/60R18 fully follow the instructions of the chain
111H tires manufacturer.
mm (in.)
A Diameter of side chain: 3.5 (0.14) If wheel covers are used, they will be
B Diameter of cross chain: 4.0 (0.16) scratched by the chain band, so remove
the covers before putting on the chains.

278
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Replacing wheels Aluminum wheel precautions

WHEN TO REPLACE YOUR WHEELS Replacement with used wheels is not rec-  When installing aluminum wheels,
If you have wheel damage such as ommended as they may have been sub- check that the wheel nuts are tight
bending, cracks or heavy corrosion, the jected to rough treatment or high mileage after driving your vehicle the first 1600
wheel should be replaced. and could fail without warning. Also, bent km (1000 miles).
If you fail to replace a damaged wheel,
wheels which have been straightened may  If you have rotated, repaired, or
have structural damage and therefore changed your tires, check that the
the tire may slip off the wheel or cause should not be used. Never use an inner
loss of handling control. wheel nuts are still tight after driving
tube in a leaking wheel which is designed 1600 km (1000 miles).
WHEEL SELECTION for a tubeless tire.
 When using tire chains, be careful not
When replacing wheels, care should be to damage the aluminum wheels.
taken to ensure that the wheels are re- CAUTION
placed by ones with the same load ca-  Use only the Toyota wheel nuts and
pacity, diameter, rim width, and offset. Observe the following instructions. wrench designed for your aluminum
Otherwise, an accident may occur re- wheels.
Correct replacement wheels are available
at your Toyota dealer.
sulting in death or serious injuries.  When balancing your wheels, use only
 Do not use wheels other than the Toyota balance weights or equivalent
A wheel of a different size or type may and a plastic or rubber hammer.
manufacturer’s recommended size,
adversely affect handling, wheel and bear-
ing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odom-
as this may cause dangerous han-  As with any wheel, periodically check
dling characteristics resulting in your aluminum wheels for damage. If
eter calibration, stopping ability, headlight
loss of control. damaged, replace immediately.
aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clear-
ance, and tire or snow chain clearance to  Do not use wheels of different
the body and chassis. brands, sizes and types, as this
may cause dangerous handling
characteristics resulting in loss of
control.

279
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

280
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

SECTION 7− 3
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
Electrical components
Checking battery condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Battery recharging precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Checking and replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Replacing light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

281
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Checking battery condition—

—Precautions —Checking battery exterior

CAUTION  If electrolyte gets on your skin, Terminals Ground cable

thoroughly wash the contact area. If
BATTERY PRECAUTIONS you feel pain or burning, get medi-
The battery produces flammable and cal attention immediately.
explosive hydrogen gas.  If electrolyte gets on your clothes,
 Do not cause a spark from the bat- there is a possibility of its soaking
tery with tools. through to your skin, so immediate-
ly take off the exposed clothing and
 Do not smoke or light a match near follow the procedure above, if nec-
the battery. essary.
The electrolyte contains poisonous  If you accidentally swallow electro-
and corrosive sulfuric acid. lyte, drink a large quantity of water Hold−down clamp
 Avoid contact with eyes, skin or or milk. Follow with milk of magne-
clothes. sia, beaten raw egg or vegetable Check the battery for corroded or loose
oil. Then go immediately for emer- terminal connections, cracks, or loose
 Never ingest electrolyte. hold−down clamp.
gency help.
 Wear protective safety glasses when a. If the battery is corroded, wash it off
working near the battery. Warning: Battery posts, terminals and
related accessories contain lead and with a solution of warm water and bak-
 Keep children away from the bat- lead compounds, chemicals know to ing soda. Coat the outside of the termi-
tery. the State of California to cause can- nals with grease to prevent further cor-
EMERGENCY MEASURES cer and reproductive harm. Wash rosion.

 If electrolyte gets in your eyes, hands after handling. b. If the terminal connections are loose,
flush your eyes with clean water tighten their clamp nuts—but do not
immediately and get immediate overtighten.
medical attention. If possible, con- c. Tighten the hold−down clamp only
tinue to apply water with a sponge enough to keep the battery firmly in
or cloth while en route to the medi- place. Overtightening may damage the
cal office. battery case.

282
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Checking battery condition Battery recharging precautions

During recharging, the battery is pro-
NOTICE Type A ducing hydrogen gas.
Green Dark Clear or
z Be sure the engine and all accesso- Therefore, before recharging:
light yellow
ries are off before performing main-
1. If recharging with the battery installed
tenance.
on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect
z When checking the battery, remove the ground cable.
the ground cable from the negative Type B
2. Be sure the power switch on the re-
terminal (”–” mark) first and rein- Blue White Red charger is off when connecting the
stall it last.
charger cables to the battery and when
z Be careful not to cause a short cir- disconnecting them.
cuit with tools.
z Take care no solution gets into the CAUTION
battery when washing it.
CHECKING BY INDICATOR  Always charge the battery in an un-
Check the battery condition by the indi- confined area. Do not charge the
cator color. battery in a garage or closed room
where there is not sufficient ventila-
Indicator color tion.
Condition
Type A Type B  Only do a slow charge (5 A or
less). Charging at a quicker rate is
Green Blue Good dangerous. The battery may ex-
Charging necessary. plode, causing personal injuries.
Have battery
Dark White
checked by your
Toyota dealer. NOTICE

Clear or Have battery Never recharge the battery while the

light Red checked by your engine is running. Also, be sure all
yellow Toyota dealer. accessories are turned off.

283
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Checking and replacing fuses

Type A fuses can be pulled out by the
pull−out tool. The location of the pull−out
tool is shown in the illustration.
Type A
If you are not sure whether the fuse has
blown, try replacing the suspected fuse
with one that you know is good.
If the fuse has blown, push a new fuse
into the clip.
Good Blown Only install a fuse with the amperage rat-
ing designated on the fuse box lid.
Type B If you do not have a spare fuse, in an
emergency you can pull out the ”RADIO”,
”DOME” or ”RR A.C” fuse, which may be
If the headlights or other electrical dispensable for normal driving, and use it
components do not work, check the if its amperage rating is the same.
fuses. If any of the fuses are blown,
If you cannot use one of the same amper-
they must be replaced.
Good Blown age, use one that is lower than, but as
See ”Fuse locations” on page 263 for close as possible to, the rating. If the
locations of the fuses. amperage is lower than that specified, the
Type C
Turn the ignition switch and inoperative fuse might blow out again but this does
component off. Pull a suspected fuse not indicate anything wrong. Be sure to
straight out and check it. get the correct fuse as soon as possible
and return the substitute to its original
Determine which fuse may be causing the
clip.
problem. The lid of the fuse box shows
the name of the circuit for each fuse. See It is a good idea to purchase a set of
Good Blown Section 8 of this manual for the functions spare fuses and keep them in your ve-
controlled by each circuit. hicle for emergencies.

284
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Adding washer fluid Replacing light bulbs—

If the new fuse immediately blows out, If any washer does not work, the wash- The following illustrations show how to
there is a problem with the electrical sys- er tank may be empty. Add washer gain access to the bulbs. When replacing
tem. Have your Toyota dealer correct it as fluid. a bulb, make sure the ignition switch and
soon as possible. You may use plain water as washer fluid. light switch are off. Use bulbs with the
However, in cold areas where tempera- wattage ratings given in the table.
CAUTION tures range below freezing point, use
washer fluid containing antifreeze. This CAUTION
Never use a fuse with a higher am- product is available at your Toyota dealer
perage rating, or any other object, in and most auto parts stores. Follow the  To prevent burning yourself, do not
place of a fuse. This may cause ex- manufacturer’s directions for how much to replace the light bulbs while they
tensive damage and possibly a fire. mix with water. are hot.
 Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas
NOTICE inside and require special handling.
They can burst or shatter if
z Do not use engine antifreeze or any
scratched or dropped. Hold a bulb
other substitute because it may
only by its plastic or metal case.
damage your vehicle’s paint.
Do not touch the glass part of a
z Do not fill washer fluid over the bulb with bare hands.
”NORMAL” level.

NOTICE
Only use a bulb of the listed type.

285
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Headlights
The inside of the lens of exterior lights Bulb
such as headlights may temporarily fog up Light bulbs No. W Type
when the lens becomes wet in the rain or
Rear turn signal
in a car wash. This is not a problem 7440 21 G
lights
because the fogging is caused by the
temperature difference between the outside Stop/tail lights 7443 21/5 D
and inside of the lens, just like the wind- Back−up lights 7440 21 D
shield fogged up in the rain. However, if
there is a large drop of water on the License plate lights — 5 D
inside of the lens, or if there is water Interior lights — 8 E
pooled inside the light, contact your Toyo-
ta dealer. Personal lights
Type A — 5 F
Bulb Type B — 8 E
Light bulbs No. W Type
Glove box light — 1.4 D 1. Open the hood.
Headlights LEFT–HAND HEADLIGHT: Remove the
9005 60 A Door courtesy
(high) — 3 D washer inlet.
lights
Headlights Be careful not to spill the washer fluid
9006 51 B Vanity lights — 1.5 E
(low) over the ”NORMAL” level.
Front turn signal A : HB3 halogen bulbs Do not place the washer inlet on the en-
and front side 1157NA 27/8 C B : HB4 halogen bulbs gine or battery.
marker lights
C : Single end bulbs (amber)
Front fog lights 9006 51 B D : Wedge base bulbs
Parking lights — 5 D E : Double end bulbs
F : Single end bulbs
G : Wedge base bulbs (amber)

286
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

2. Turn the bulb base counterclockwise 3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb base. 4. Install a new bulb base by turning it
to the front of the vehicle as shown. If the connector is tight, wiggle it. clockwise to the front of the vehicle.
LEFT–HAND HEADLIGHT: Install the
washer inlet securely.
Aiming is not necessary after replacing
the bulb. When aiming adjustment is nec-
essary, contact your Toyota dealer.

287
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Front fog lights

1. Turn the bulb base counterclockwise 2. Pull the bulb out of the bulb base. 3. Install a new bulb base by turning it
to the front of the vehicle as shown. If the connector is tight, wiggle it. clockwise to the front of the vehicle.
Aiming is not necessary after replacing
the bulb. When aiming adjustment is nec-
essary, contact your Toyota dealer.

288
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Front turn signal and front

side marker lights —Parking lights

Use a Phillips–head screwdriver. Use a Phillips–head screwdriver.

289
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Stop and tail lights

Use a Phillips–head screwdriver.

290
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

—Rear turn signal, stop/tail,

and back–up lights —License plate lights

Use a flat−bladed screwdriver. a: Back–up light

b: Rear turn signal light
c: Stop/tail light

291
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

292
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

SECTION 8
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions and weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Service specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

293
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Dimensions and weight Engine Fuel

Overall length mm (in.) 4890 (192.5) Model: Fuel type:
Overall width mm (in.) 1940 (76.4) 2UZ−FE Unleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87
Type: (Research Octane Number 91) or higher.
Overall height mm (in.) 1875 (73.8)∗1 For improved vehicle performance, the
8 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline
Wheelbase mm (in.) 2850 (112.2) use of premium unleaded gasoline with
Bore and stroke, mm (in.): an Octane Rating of 91 (Research Oc-
Front tread mm (in.) 1620 (63.8) 94.0 84.0 (3.70 3.30) tane Number 96) or higher is recom-
Rear tread mm (in.) 1615 (63.6) Displacement, cm3 (cu. in.): mended.
Vehicle capacity weight 4664 (284.6) Fuel tank capacity, L (gal., Imp. gal.):
(occupants + luggage) 96 (25.4, 21.1)
kg (lb.) 610 (1345)
∗1 : Unladen vehicle

294
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Service specifications
ENGINE Recommended oil viscosity: COOLING SYSTEM
Valve clearance (engine cold), mm (in.): SAE 5W−30 Total capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.)
Intake 0.15—0.25 (0.006—0.010) Without rear heater 14.7 (15.5, 12.9)
Exhaust 0.25—0.35 (0.010—0.014) With rear heater 15.4 (16.3, 13.6)
Spark plug type: Coolant type:
DENSO SK20R11 “Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” is filled
NGK IFR6A11 in your Toyota vehicle. In order to avoid
Spark plug gap, mm (in.): technical problems, we strongly recom-
1.1 (0.043) mend using “Toyota Genuine Long Life
ENGINE LUBRICATION Coolant” or equivalent.

Oil capacity (drain and refill), L (qt., Imp. Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-
Temperature range anticipated before next oil
qt.) change ther details.
With filter 6.8 (7.2, 6.0) With ethylene−glycol type coolant for prop-
Without filter 6.4 (6.8, 5.6) er corrosion protection of aluminum com-
Oil grade: Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur- ponents

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is filled in ther details. Do not use alcohol type antifreeze or plain
your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota ap- water alone.
proved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or BATTERY
equivalent to satisfy the following grade Open voltage∗ at 20 C (68 F):
and viscosity. 12.6—12.8 V Fully charged
Oil grade: 12.2—12.4 V Half charged
API grade, SL “Energy−Conserving” or 11.8—12.0 V Discharged
ILSAC multigrade engine oil. ∗: Voltage that is checked 20 minutes af-
ter the key is removed with all the lights
turned off
Charging rates:
5 A max.

295
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION TRANSFER CHASSIS LUBRICATION

Fluid capacity (drain and refill), L (qt., Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.) Wheel bearings:
Imp. qt.) 1.3 (1.4, 1.1) Lithium base wheel bearing grease,
Up to 3.0 (3.2, 2.6) Oil type: NLGI No.2
Fluid type: Gear oil API GL−4 or GL−5 Front drive shaft thrust bushings:
“Toyota Genuine ATF Type T−IV” Recommended oil viscosity: Synthetic oil and lithium soap base
Change automatic transmission fluid only SAE 75W−90 chassis grease, NLGI No.1
as necessary. DIFFERENTIAL Propeller shafts:
Generally, it is necessary to change auto- Lithium base wheel bearing grease,
Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.): NLGI No.2
matic transmission fluid only if your ve- Front 1.6 (1.7, 1.4)
hicle is driven under one of the Special BRAKES
Operating Conditions listed in your Rear 3.3 (3.5, 2.9)
Minimum pedal clearance when depressed
”Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or ”Own- Oil type: with the force of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lbf)
er’s Manual Supplement”. When changing Standard differential with the engine running, mm (in.):
the automatic transmission fluid, use only Hypoid gear oil API GL−5 116 (4.6)
“Toyota Genuine ATF Type T−IV” (ATF Limited−slip differential
JWS3309 or NWS6500) to aid in assuring Hypoid gear oil for limited−slip Pedal free play, mm (in.):
optimum transaxle performance. differential API GL−5 1—6 (0.04—0.24)
Pad wear limit, mm (in.):
Notice: Using automatic transmission Recommended oil viscosity: 1.0 (0.04)
fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF Above −18 C (0 F) Lining wear limit, mm (in.):
Type T−IV” may cause deterioration in SAE 90 1.0 (0.04)
shift quality, locking up of your trans- Below −18 C (0 F) Parking brake adjustment when pulled with
mission accompanied by vibration, and SAE 80W or 80W−90 the force of 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbf):
ultimately damage the automatic trans- 4—6 clicks
mission of your vehicle. Fluid type:
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

296
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

STEERING
Wheel free play:
Less than 40 mm (1.6 in.)
Power steering fluid type:
Automatic transmission fluid DEXRONII
or III

297
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Tires
Tire size and pressure:
kPa (psi)
Front Rear
Tire size Wheel size
Normal driving Trailer towing Normal driving Trailer towing
P275/65R17 113S 200 (29) 220 (32) 220 (32) 240 (35) 17 8JJ
P275/60R18 111H 200 (29) 220 (32) 220 (32) 240 (35) 18 8JJ

Wheel nut torque, N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf): 131 (13.4, 96.6)

NOTE: For a complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see ”Checking tire pressure” on page 274 through
”Aluminum wheel precautions” on page 279.

298
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Fuses

Engine compartment Left side kick panel Right side kick panel

Fuses 8. HAZ−TRN 15 A: Emergency flashers, 18. BAT 30 A: All components in ”ECU−B2”

1. ABS NO.2 40 A: Anti−lock brake sys- Turn signal lights 19. TEL 7.5 A: No circuit
tem 9. ALT−S 7.5 A: Charging system 20. AMP 30 A: Audio system
2. ABS NO.1 50 A: Anti−lock brake system 10. NV−IR 20 A: No circuit 21. EFI or ECD No.1 25 A: Multiport fuel
3. AHC 50 A: No circuit 11. FR FOG 15 A: Fog lights injection system/Sequential multiport fuel in-
4. ST1 7.5 A: Mutiport fuel injection system/ 12. TOWING BRK 30 A: Trailer electric jection system
Sequential multiport fuel injection brake 22. AM2 15 A: All components in ”IGN”
5. TOWING 30 A: Trailer lights 13. HEAD CLNER 20 A: Headlight cleaner 23. ETCS 10 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-
6. MIR HTR 15 A: Outside rearview mirror 14. FR−IG 10 A: Charging system tem/Sequential multiport fuel injection system
defogger 15. PANEL 7.5 A: Instrument panel light 24. HORN 10 A: Horns
7. RR HTR 10 A: Rear air conditioning sys- 16. TOWING TAIL 30 A: Trailer lights 25. HEAD (RH−LWR) 10 A: Right−hand
tem headlight (low beam)
17. TAIL 15 A: Parking lights, Tail lights

299
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

26. HEAD (LH−LWR) 10 A: Left−hand head- 42. DBL LOCK 15 A: Double lock system 63. GAUGE2 10 A: Back−up lights
light (low beam) 43. BATT CHARGE 30 A 64. MET 7.5 A: Gauges and meters
27. HEAD (RH−UPR) 20 A: Right−hand 44. A/C 15 A: Air conditioning system 65. IGN 7.5 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-
headlight (high beam) tem/Sequential multiport fuel injection
45. STOP 15 A: Stop lights
28. HEAD (LH−UPR) 20 A: Left−hand head- system
light (high beam) 46. OBD−2 7.5 A: On−board diagnosis system
66. SECURITY 7.5 A: Theft deterrent sys-
29. PWR OUTLET 15 A: Power outlets 47. IDEL UP 7.5 A: Idle−up system tem
30. CIG 15 A: Cigarette lighter 48. LH SEAT 30 A: Power seat system 67. P/W (RR) 20 A: Power window
31. ACC 7.5 A: Instrument panel light 49. DOOR 25 A: Power door lock system, 68. P/W (FR) 20 A: Power window
Power windows
32. AM1 7.5 A: Multiport fuel injection sys- 69. TIL&TEL 20 A: Tilt and telescopic
tem/Sequential multiport fuel injection 50. SUN ROOF 25 A: Electronic moon roof steering
system 51. RR WIPER 15 A: Rear wiper system 70. RR A/C 30 A: Rear air conditioning
33. DEFOG 20 A: Rear window defogger 52. ECU−B2 10 A: Power door lock system, system
34. AHC−B 15 A: Active height control sus- Power window 71. RH SEAT 30 A: Power seat system
pension (AHC) 53. DIFF 20 A: Four−wheel drive system
35. FUEL HTR 20 A: Fuel heater 54. WASHER 15 A: Windshield washer
36. POWER HTR 7.5 A: Power heater 55. RADIO 10 A: Audio system
37. AHC−IG 20 A: Active height control sus- 56. DOME 10 A: Interior lights
pension (AHC) 57. VGRS 40 A: Variable gear ratio steer-
38. EFI or ECD No.2 10 A: Emission control ing system
system 58. P/W (FL) 20 A: Power window
39. GAUGE1 10 A: Gauges and meters 59. P/W (RL) 20 A: Power window
40. ECU−IG1 10 A: Multiport fuel injection 60. WIPER 25 A: Windshield wiper
system/Sequential multiport fuel injec-
tion system 61. ECU−IG2 10 A: Rear air conditioning
system
41. ECU−B1 10 A: Navigation system
62. SEAT HTR 15 A: Seat heater
300
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

SECTION 9
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S.
OWNERS AND UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY
GRADING
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

301
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Reporting safety defects for

U.S. owners Uniform tire quality grading
If you believe that your vehicle has To contact NHTSA, you may either This information has been prepared in ac-
a defect which could cause a crash call the Auto Safety Hotline toll−free cordance with regulations issued by the
National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
or could cause injury or death, you at 1−800−424−9393 (or 366−0123 tration of the U.S. Department of Trans-
should immediately inform the Na- in Washington, D.C. area) or write portation. It provides the purchasers and/
tional Highway Traffic Safety Ad- to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of or prospective purchasers of Toyota
ministration (NHTSA) in addition to Transportation, Washington, D.C. vehicles with information on uniform tire
quality grading.
notifying Toyota Motor Sales, 20590. You can also obtain other
Your Toyota dealer will help answer any
U.S.A., Inc. (Toll−free: information about motor vehicle
questions you may have as you read this
1−800−331−4331). safety from the Hotline. information.
If NHTSA receives similar com- DOT quality grades—All passenger ve-
plaints, it may open an investiga- hicle tires must conform to Federal
Safety Requirements in addition to
tion, and if it finds that a safety de- these grades. Quality grades can be
fect exists in a group of vehicles, it found where applicable on the tire side-
may order a recall and remedy wall between tread shoulder and maxi-
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot mum section width. For example: Tread-
wear 200 Traction AA Temperature A.
become involved in individual prob-
lems between you, your dealer, or
Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

302
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Tread wear—The tread wear grade is a Temperature A, B, C—The temperature

comparative rating based on the wear rate grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
of the tire when tested under controlled representing the tire’s resistance to the
conditions on a specified government test generation of heat and its ability to dissi-
course. For example, a tire graded 150 pate heat when tested under controlled
would wear one and a half (1−1/2) times conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
as well on the government course as a test wheel. Sustained high temperature
tire graded 100. The relative performance can cause the material of the tire to de-
of tires depends upon the actual condi- generate and reduce tire life, and exces-
tions of their use, however, and may de- sive temperature can lead to sudden tire
part significantly from the norm due to failure. The grade C corresponds to a lev-
variations in driving habits, service prac- el of performance which all passenger car
tices and differences in road characteris- tires must meet under the Federal Motor
tics and climate. Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades
Traction AA, A, B, C—The traction B and A represent higher levels of perfor-
grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, mance on the laboratory test wheel than
B, and C, and they represent the tire’s the minimum required by law.
ability to stop on wet pavement as mea- Warning: The temperature grades for this
sured under controlled conditions on spe- tire are established for a tire that is prop-
cified government test surfaces of asphalt erly inflated and not overloaded. Exces-
and concrete. A tire marked C may have sive speed, underinflation, or excessive
poor traction performance. loading, either separately or in combina-
Warning: The traction grade assigned to tion, can cause heat buildup and possible
this tire is based on braking (straight tire failure.
ahead) traction tests and does not include
cornering (turning) traction.

303
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

304
’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

INDEX

305
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

You should know as much about the quality and

importance of proper maintenance of your new
vehicle as the people who built it.
The Toyota authorized Repair Manual
tells you how to maintain your vehicle and
enables you to correctly perform your own
maintenance.
The best way to keep your new vehicle in top
running order is to maintain it properly from
the moment you drive it off the showroom
floor.
The Toyota authorized Repair Manual is
packed with literally everything you need to
know to perform your own maintenance in
virtually every area of your new vehicle.
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Maintenance procedures for the engine,

chassis, body, electrical system, and more,
are clearly explained and illustrated.
Repair Manual Information
Periodic maintenance and tune−up
Where to obtain the
Periodic maintenance and tune−up helps to pre-
vent small problems from growing into larger ones lat-
Repair Manual
er on. The repair manual outlines exactly what main-
tenance is required and clearly explains how to do the The repair manual for LAND CRUISER, written
work yourself step−by−step. in English, may be purchased as applicable from
Areas covered include such things as spark plug re- any Toyota dealer.
placement, valve clearance adjustment and engine oil Pub. Name: 2003 LAND CRUISER Repair
and filter replacement. Manual
Pub. No.: Vol.1RM966U1
Vol.2RM966U2
 ’03 L/C U (L/O 0301)

Seat Belt Warning

WE REALLY CARE ABOUT YOU PLEASE BUCKLE UP

Toyota has made a special effort to encourage use of seat belts.

Toyota belts are:

Comfortable

Easy to use

Convenient
We encourage you to use your belts every time you drive.